Owner's Manual - Chevrolet · Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Mexico-...

2k15_chev_captiva_sport_23446878A.ai

(Modern Bridge - Level 2 / #23321109)

Spine = Printer Adjust

Color = Black

Date = 03/18/14

Captiva Sport

2015

2015 C

aptiv

a S

port

chevrolet.com (U.S.)chevrolet.com.mx (Mexico)

23446878 A

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Mexico-7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14

2015 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-35Universal Remote System . . . . 5-41

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-21Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-28Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-32Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-47

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37


2015 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . 11-12Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, andCAPTIVA are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

About Driving the VehicleAs with other vehicles of this type,failure to operate this vehiclecorrectly may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident. Be sure toread the driving guidelines in thismanual in the section called “Drivingand Operating” and specifically

Driver Behavior on page 9-2,Driving Environment on page 9-2,and Vehicle Design on page 9-2.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 23446878 A First Printing ©2014 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

{ Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

v +/-: Audio Steering WheelControls

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Head RestraintAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Passenger Sensing System(United States) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Universal Remote System . . . 1-19

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8-8.

2. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6-4.

3. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals onpage 6-3.

4. Instrument Cluster on page 5-9.

5. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

6. Infotainment on page 7-1.

7. Auxiliary Input Jack (IfEquipped). See AuxiliaryDevices on page 7-15.

8. Fog Lamps on page 6-4 (IfEquipped).

Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.

9. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-23.

10. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4-1.

11. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-14.

12. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10-3.

13. Cruise Control on page 9-30.

14. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2.

15. Horn on page 5-3.

16. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2 (If Equipped).

17. Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5-4.

18. Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-28.

19. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9-21.

20. Climate Control Systems onpage 8-1 (If Equipped).

Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-5 (IfEquipped).

21. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-3.

22. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator. See PassengerSensing System (UnitedStates) on page 3-24.

23. Passenger Safety BeltReminder. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-11.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter functions workup to 20 m (65 ft) away from thevehicle.

Without Remote Start Shown, withRemote Start Similar

Q : Press to lock all the doors,including the liftgate.

K : Press once to unlock the driverdoor. If K is pressed again withinfive seconds, all remaining doorsunlock.

L : Press and release to locatethe vehicle. Press and holdL to

activate the panic alarm. PressLagain to turn off the alarm.

See Keys on page 2-1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-2.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that starts theengine from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Engine UsingRemote Start

To start the vehicle:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ untilthe parking lamps flash. If thevehicle's lights can not be seen,press and hold/ for at leastfour seconds.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. The


In Brief 1-5

doors will be locked and the climatecontrol system will operate at thesame setting as when the vehiclewas last turned off.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto the ON/RUN position to drive thevehicle.

If the vehicle is left running, itautomatically shuts off after10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To manually shut off a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-4.

Door LocksFrom the outside, lock or unlock thedoor using the key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-2.

From the inside, push or pull themanual door lock on each door.

Use the power door lock switch onthe front doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks on page 2-6 andPower Door Locks on page 2-6.

Safety Locks

The vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To activate, insert a key into the slotand turn it to the horizontal position.The door can only be opened fromthe outside.

To return the door to normaloperation, open the door and turnthe slot to the vertical position.


1-6 In Brief

LiftgateTo lock or unlock the liftgate fromoutside the vehicle, press Q or Ktwice on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-2.

To lock or unlock the liftgate frominside the vehicle, press Q or K onthe power door lock switch.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the underside of the liftgatehandle and pull up.

To close the liftgate, pull down usingthe handle and close until it latches.

See Liftgate on page 2-8.

Windows

Press the front of the switch to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.

The power windows operate whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or while in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-17.

Express-Down Window

The driver window switch has anexpress-down feature that lowersthe window without holding theswitch. Press the switch part wayand the window will open a smallamount. Press the switch down allthe way and release it and thewindow lowers all the way.

To stop the window while it islowering, press and release theswitch.

See Power Windows on page 2-13.

Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rear seatpassengers from operating thewindows. Press the lockout switchon the driver door panel to activatethe switch. Press it again todeactivate the switch.


In Brief 1-7

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown to raise or lower the seat.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.

Power Seats

If available, move the controlforward or rearward to adjust theseat position.


1-8 In Brief

To raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion, move thefront or rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Lumbar Adjustment

If available, move the lever forwardor rearward to increase or decreasethe lumbar support.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.


In Brief 1-9

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-5.

Second Row SeatsThe rear seatbacks can be foldeddown to increase cargo space.

See Rear Seats on page 3-8.

Heated Seats

Automatic Climate Control SystemShown

If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the ignition must be on.

Press L or M to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,


1-10 In Brief

and then to the off setting. Thelights indicate two for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3-6.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3-2and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3-9.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3-11.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-12.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3-38.

Passenger SensingSystem (United States)

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will light on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Sensing System(United States) on page 3-24 formore information.


In Brief 1-11

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Power Outside Mirrors

To adjust the power mirrors:

1. Turn the knob to choose theleft (L) or the right (R) mirror.

2. Use the knob to move theselected mirror so the side andthe area behind the vehicleis seen.

3. Return the control to the centerposition so the mirror cannot bemoved.

Manual Folding Mirrors

The outside mirrors can be foldedinward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic carwash. To fold, pull the mirror towardthe vehicle. Push the mirror outwardto return it to the original position.

Automatic Dimming Feature

If equipped, the outside driver mirrorautomatically dims to reduce glarefrom vehicle headlamps.

Interior Mirrors

Adjustment

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

If equipped, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from headlamps.See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2-12.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

If equipped, automatic dimmingreduces the glare of the headlampsfrom behind. This feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started. SeeAutomatic Dimming Rearview Mirroron page 2-12.


1-12 In Brief

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

There are front and rear domelamps in the overhead console andthe headliner.

* : Press the button (1) on theoverhead console to keep the domelamps and other interior lampsturned off while any door is open.

Press this button again to return it tothe out position and the lampsautomatically come on when anydoor is opened.

+ : Press the button (2) to turn thedome lamps on and off while thedoors are closed.

Reading Lamps

The front reading lamps are in theoverhead console.


In Brief 1-13

The rear reading lamps are in theheadliner.

To turn the reading lamps on or off,press the button next to each lamp.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

9 : Turns off the exterior lamps.The knob returns to the AUTOposition after it is released.

AUTO: Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6-1. Turn and Lane-Change Signals

on page 6-3. Headlamp High/Low-Beam

Changer on page 6-2

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on theright side of the steering column.

Move the lever up or down to selectthe wiper speed.

8: Single wipe, briefly move thelever down. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released. Forseveral wipes, hold the lever down.

9: Turns the windshield wipers off.


1-14 In Brief

3: Sets a delay between wipes.Move the switch on top of the leverleft for less frequent wipes or rightfor more frequent wipes.

a : Slow wipes.

1 : Fast wipes.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield wiper lever tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers. The wipers willcontinue until the lever is releasedor the maximum wash time isreached.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper and rear wash buttonis on the instrument panel above theclimate control system.

= : Press to wash and wipe therear window.

5 : Press to turn the delayedwiping on or off.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3 and Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5-4.

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate controlsystem functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-2.

Climate Control System

1. Fan Control

2. Outside Air

3. Temperature Control

4. Recirculation

5. Air Delivery Mode Control

6. Air Conditioning

7. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

8. Rear Window Defogger


In Brief 1-15

Automatic Climate Control System

1. Fan Control

2. Outside Air


4. Recirculation


6. Air Conditioning



See Climate Control Systems onpage 8-1 or Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8-5 (IfEquipped).

Transmission

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer.To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual).


1-16 In Brief

2. Press the plus/minus buttonlocated on the shift lever, toincrease or decrease the gearrange available.

See Manual Mode on page 9-22.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)O : Press to turn the system onand off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, or SiriusXM®, if equipped.

f : Select radio stations.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Seek or scanstations.

4 (Information): If equipped withXM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features,press to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS or SiriusXM station, or CD,MP3, or WMA song. Song titleinformation will be displayed on thetop line of the display while the artistinformation will be displayed on thebottom line, if the information isavailable during XM, CD, MP3,or WMA playback. Wheninformation is not available, "NoInfo" displays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7-3.

Storing a Favorite Station

A maximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theradio FAV button. Press FAV to gothrough up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stationsavailable per page. Each page offavorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or SiriusXMstations.

See Operation on page 7-3.

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

2. Press O to turn the radio on.

3. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD,and YYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) display.


In Brief 1-17

4. Press the softkey below the tabto be changed.

5. Increase or decrease the time ordate by turning f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

See Clock on page 5-6.

Satellite RadioIf equipped, SiriusXM® is a satelliteradio service based in the48 contiguous United States and10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

For more information, refer to:. www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-209-0079 (Canada)

See Satellite Radio on page 7-6.

Portable Audio DevicesThe vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack on theaudio faceplate and a USB port inthe center console. Some portableaudio devices such as iPods®, MP3players, and USB storage devicescan be connected to the vehicleusing a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or aUSB cable.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-15.

Bluetooth®

If equipped with a Bluetooth system,it allows users with aBluetooth-enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,see www.gm.com/bluetooth andBluetooth on page 7-19.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

+ / −: Press and release to go tothe next or the previous preset radiostation or CD track.

J / 0 : For vehicles with Bluetooth®

and OnStar®, press and hold tointeract with those systems. Pressand release to mute the system.Press it again to turn the soundback on.


1-18 In Brief

K : Press to reject an incomingcall, or end a current call.

v + or v −: Move the thumbwheelup or down to increase or todecrease the volume.

Cruise Control

E : Press to turn the cruise controlon or off. The indicator light on thebutton turns on or off.

RES+: If there is a set speed inmemory, move the thumbwheel upbriefly to resume that speed or hold

upward to accelerate. If cruisecontrol is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.

−SET: Move the thumbwheel downbriefly to set the speed and activatecruise control. If cruise control isalready active, use to decreasespeed.

See Cruise Control on page 9-30.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC has different displays in theinstrument cluster which can beaccessed by pressing the DICbuttons on the instrument panel,below the exterior lamps control.

DIC Buttons

3 : Press to display the trip andfuel displays.

T : Press to display the vehicleinformation displays.

U : Press to customize the featuresettings on the vehicle. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-35 formore information.

V : Press to set or reset certainfunctions and to turn off oracknowledge messages on the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-23.

Vehicle Personalization

Some vehicle features can beprogrammed by using the DICbuttons on the instrument panel tothe left of the steering wheel. Thesefeatures include:. Language. Door Lock and Unlock Settings. Lighting. Chime Volume


In Brief 1-19

. Remote Start

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-35.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle, on theinfotainment system display, whenthe vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9-34.

Parking AssistIf equipped, this system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph). Rear Parking Assist(RPA) uses audible beeps toprovide distance and systeminformation.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Parking Assist on page 9-32.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The power outlets are located insidethe center floor console, on the rearof the center floor console, and inthe rear cargo compartment.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5-7.

Universal Remote System

If equipped, the Universal HomeRemote System allows for garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices to beprogrammed to work with thesebuttons in the vehicle.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5-41.


1-20 In Brief

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe Traction Control System (TCS)limits wheel spin. The system turnson automatically every time thevehicle is started.

The StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem also turns on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.. To turn off or on TCS, press and

release the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton g on the instrumentpanel. The appropriate DICmessage displays.

. To turn off both Traction Controland StabiliTrak, press and holdthe TCS/StabiliTrak button g

until the StabiliTrak Off light gilluminates and the appropriateDIC message displays.

. Press the TCS/StabiliTrak buttong again to turn on both systems.The appropriate DIC messagedisplays.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-28.

This vehicle also has a Brake PedalOverride feature that limits enginetorque when the brake pedal isapplied. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-28.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-46.


In Brief 1-21

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.

Resetting the Oil Life System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-23 and Engine OilMessages on page 5-30.

2. Press V for five seconds toreset the oil life at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the OIL LIFE REMAININGvalue is not 100%, the systemneeds to be reset again.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-10.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuelon page 9-37. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under Fuel on page 9-36.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.


1-22 In Brief

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New Chevrolet owners areautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance Program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.

OnStar®

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connection, andDiagnostic Services. OnStarservices may require a paidsubscription. See OnStar Overviewon page 14-1.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-6Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 2-9Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-10

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-12Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-12Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The two keys can be used for theignition and all locks.

The key code is stamped on the keynumber plate and can be used tomake new keys at any dealer. Storethis information in a safe placeoutside the vehicle.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

If equipped, with an active OnStarsubscription, an OnStar Advisormay remotely unlock the vehicle.See “OnStar” if equipped.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter functions workup to 20 m (65 ft) away from thevehicle.

Some conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

Without Remote Start Shown, withRemote Start Similar



/ (Remote Vehicle Start):If equipped, this button is used tooperate the remote start feature.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-4.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors, including the liftgate. Thevehicle's lamps may flash and thehorn may sound. See “Remote DoorLock” under Vehicle Personalizationon page 5-35.

On some models, the fuel door willalso be locked when the doors arelocked.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockthe driver door. If K is pressedagain within five seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on. The exterior lamps mayflash when unlocking the vehicle.See “Remote Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-35.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times. Press and holdL toactivate the panic alarm. The turnsignal lamps flash and the hornsounds repeatedly for 30 seconds.The alarm turns off when theignition is turned to ON/RUN orwhenL is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once the

new transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up to eighttransmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEREMOTE KEY FOB BATTERYmessage displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See“REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOBBATTERY” under Key and LockMessages on page 5-31.

{ Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.



To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into thenotch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Reassemble the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped with a remote startingfeature, the engine can be startedfrom outside of the vehicle.

/ (Remote Start): This button ison the RKE transmitter if the vehiclehas remote start.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle could run out of fuel.

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)range may be less while the vehicleis running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

Starting the Engine UsingRemote Start

To start the vehicle:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ untilthe parking lamps flash. If thevehicle's lights can not be seen,press and hold/ for at leastfour seconds.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system will operate at thesame setting as when the vehiclewas last turned off.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto the ON/RUN position to drive thevehicle.



If the vehicle is left running, itautomatically shuts off after10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

Extending Engine Run Time

To extend the engine run time by10 minutes, repeat Steps 1–3 whilethe engine is still running. Theengine run time can only beextended if it is the first remote startsince the vehicle has been driven.Remote start can be extendedone time.

If the remote start procedure is usedagain before the first 10-minute timeframe has ended, the first10 minutes will immediately expireand the second 10-minute timeframe will start.

For example, if Q and then/ arepressed again after the vehicle hasbeen running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing theengine to run for a total of15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

After the vehicle's engine has beenstarted two times using the remotestart button, the ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To manually shut off a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

Conditions in Which theRemote Start Will Not Work

The vehicle cannot be started usingthe remote start feature if the key isin the ignition, the hood is open, or ifthere is an emission control systemmalfunction.

The engine turns off during a remotestart if the coolant temperature getstoo high or if the oil pressuregets low.

Remote Start Ready

If the vehicle does not have theremote vehicle start feature, it mayhave the remote start ready feature.This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer's remotevehicle start feature.

To add the manufacturer's remotevehicle start feature to the vehicle,see your dealer.



Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock a door, use thekey from the outside or the doorlock from the inside.

Power Door LocksUse the power door lock switch onthe front doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Delayed LockingA chime will sound to indicate adoor or the liftgate is open when youtry to lock the doors with the powerdoor lock switch. The doors will notlock, and the theft‐deterrent systemwill not arm until all the doors areclosed and five seconds havepassed.

Automatic Door Locks

Automatic Door Lock

The doors are programmed toautomatically lock when the shiftlever is moved out of P (Park).

This feature can be programmedthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “Auto Door Lock”in Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-35.



Automatic Door Unlock

The doors can be programmed toautomatically unlock when the shiftlever is moved into P (Park). See“Auto Door Unlock” in VehiclePersonalization on page 5-35.

Lockout ProtectionWhen the power door lock switch ispressed with the key in the ignition,and any door is open, all the doorslock and the driver door unlocks.When doors are closed with the keyin the ignition, the horn will soundas a reminder.

If the doors are locked with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, and the key is in theignition, a chime sounds and allexcept the driver door lock.

The lockout protection feature canbe overridden by holding the powerdoor lock switch for three seconds.

Safety Locks

{ Caution

Pulling the inside door handlewhile the rear door safety locksare engaged could damage yourvehicle. Do not pull the insidedoor handle while the rear doorsafety locks are engaged.

The vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To activate, insert a key into the slotand turn it to the horizontal position.The door can only be opened fromthe outside.

To return the door to normaloperation, open the door and turnthe slot to the vertical position.



Doors

Liftgate

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-20.

{ Caution

To avoid damage to the liftgate orliftgate glass, make sure the areaabove and behind the liftgate isclear before opening it.

To lock or unlock the liftgate fromoutside the vehicle, press Q or Ktwice on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-2.

To lock or unlock the liftgate frominside the vehicle, press Q or K onthe power door lock switch. SeePower Door Locks on page 2-6.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the underside of the liftgatehandle and pull up.

To close the liftgate, pull down usingthe handle and close until it latches.



Liftgate Operation with Loss ofPower

To open the liftgate if the vehicle'sbattery is disconnected or thevoltage is low, access the releaselever. Remove the interior trim coveron the inside of the liftgate. Use atool to push the lever on the latchuntil the liftgate releases.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThe vehicle may have a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

The security light is near the centerof the instrument panel.

To arm the theft-deterrent system,press Q on the RKE transmitterwhen all doors and the hood, on

vehicles equipped with the remotestart feature only, are closed. Thesecurity light will come on solid forapproximately 30 seconds and thenflash slowly. If Q on the RKEtransmitter is pressed a secondtime, the theft-deterrent system willarm immediately, bypassing the30-second delay. The contenttheft-deterrent alarm is not armeduntil the security light flashes slowly.

If any door, liftgate, or the hood, onvehicles equipped with the remotestart feature only, are openedwithout using the key or pressing Kon the RKE transmitter, the exteriorlamps flash and the horn will soundfor about 30 seconds. If Q or K onthe RKE transmitter is not pressed,the alarm sounds and periodicallyrepeats. If the system does notoperate as described above, seeyour dealer for service.

The theft-deterrent system does notarm if you lock the doors with a key.



To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident, always unlock a door withthe RKE transmitter or a key.Unlocking a door any other way willset off the alarm if the system hasbeen armed.

If you set off the alarm by accident,turn off the alarm by pressing Q orK on the RKE transmitter or byplacing the key in the ignition andturning it to START.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver window and open thedriver door.

2. Get out of the vehicle, close thedoor, and activate the system bylocking the doors with the RKEtransmitter.

3. Wait for the security light to flashslowly.

4. Reach in through the window,unlock the door with the manualdoor lock, and open the door.This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould, but the vehicle's headlampsflash, check to see if the hornworks. The horn fuse may be blown.To replace the fuse, see Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10-31.

If the alarm does not sound or thevehicle's headlamps do not flash,see your dealer for service.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on if thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem operation.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses that someone is using thewrong key, it prevents the vehiclefrom starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

When trying to start the vehicle ifthe engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrumentcluster comes on, there may be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition off and tryagain.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key does not appear to bedamaged, wait about five minutes



and try another ignition key andcheck the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10-31.If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty. See yourdealer who can service thePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to “learn” the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedfor the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys are lostor do not operate, you must seeyour dealer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key III+ to have keysmade and programmed to thesystem.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank that is cut exactly asthe ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key has 1stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmedkey in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine does notstart, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to the ON/RUNposition within five seconds ofthe original key being turned tothe LOCK/OFF position.

The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If the PASS-Key III+ key is lost ordamaged, see your dealer or alocksmith to have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

To adjust the power mirrors:

1. Turn the knob to choose theleft (L) or the right (R) mirror.

2. Use the knob to move theselected mirror so the side andthe area behind the vehicleis seen.

3. Return the control to the centerposition so the mirror cannot bemoved.

Automatic Dimming Feature

If equipped, the automatic dimmingmirror on the driver side reduces theglare from the headlamps frombehind.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors. These mirrors can be foldedinward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic carwash. To fold, pull the mirror towardthe vehicle. Push the mirror outwardto return it to the original position.

Heated MirrorsThe vehicle may have heatedmirrors.

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the outside rearviewmirrors. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8-5.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorIf equipped, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorIf equipped, automatic dimmingreduces the glare of the headlampsfrom behind. This feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started.



Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys on page 2-1.

Press the front of the switch to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.

The power windows operate whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or while in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-17.

Express-Down Window

The driver window switch has anexpress-down feature that lowersthe window without holding theswitch. Press the switch part wayand the window will open a smallamount. Press the switch down allthe way and release it and thewindow lowers all the way.

To stop the window while it islowering, press and release theswitch.

Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rear seatpassengers from operating thewindows. Press the lockout switch



on the driver door panel to activatethe switch. Press it again todeactivate the switch.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow or, if equipped, extendalong the rod.

Roof

Sunroof

To operate the sunroof, the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN, or ACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) must beactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-17.

1. Open/Close: Slide and releasethe switch rearward to expressopen the sunroof. Slide theswitch forward or rearward tostop movement.

The sunshade opensautomatically with the sunroof orcan be manually operated. Thesunshade cannot be closed withthe sunroof open.

Slide and hold the switchforward to close the sunroof.The sunshade must be closedmanually.

2. Vent Open/Close: Press andhold the switch to vent thesunroof. Pull and hold the switchto close it. The sunshade mustbe manually operated when thesunroof is in the vent position.



Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, that isnormal.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-3

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-16Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-16Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-19When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Passenger Sensing System(United States) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-28

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-35Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-36Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-46


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Front Seats

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.



Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions that canbe adjusted the same way as thefront head restraints.

Rear outboard head restraints arenot removable.

Active Head RestraintsThe vehicle has an active headrestraint system in the front seatingpositions. These automatically tiltforward to reduce the risk of neckinjury if the vehicle is hit frombehind.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown to raise or lower the seat.



Power Seat Adjustment

If available, move the controlforward or rearward to adjust theseat position.

To raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion, move thefront or rear of the control upor down.

Lumbar Adjustment

If equipped, move the lever forwardor rearward to increase or decreasethe lumbar support.



Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.


1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.





1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

Heated Front Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Automatic Climate Control SystemShown

If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the ignition must be on.

Press L or M to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then to the off setting. Thelights indicate two for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.



The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Folding SeatbackThe front passenger seatback mayfold flat.

{ Warning

If you fold the seatback forward tocarry longer objects, such as skis,be sure any such cargo is notnear an airbag. In a crash, aninflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. Thiscould cause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3-19 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

{ Warning

Things you put on this seatbackcan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.Remove or secure all itemsbefore driving.

To fold the seatback:

1. Lower the head restraint all theway. See Head Restraints onpage 3-2.

2. Move the seat as far back aspossible. See Seat Adjustmenton page 3-3.

3. Lift the lever fully and fold theseatback forward until itdisengages.

4. Continue lowering the seatbackuntil it is completely folded.



To raise the seatback:

1. Raise the seatback and push itrearward until it re-engages.

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

Rear SeatsFolding the Seatback

{ Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

To fold a seatback:

1. Unbuckle the rear safety beltsand put the front seatback in theupright position. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 3-5.

2. Lift the lever on the top of theseatback and fold the seatbackforward.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for theother seatback, if desired.

Raising the Seatback

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.


1. Lift the seatback up and push itback into place.

2. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is lockedinto position.

3. Make sure the safety belts arenot twisted or caught in theseatback.

4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for theother seatback, if necessary.

When the seatback is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.

Reclining the Seatback


1. Lift and hold the lever on top ofthe seatback.

2. Tilt the seatback rearward, andthen release the lever.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for theother seatback, if desired.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areas

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5-11.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.



Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3-30 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3-32.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

On vehicles with a PassengerSensing System, engaging thechild restraint locking feature inthe right front seating positionmay affect the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System (United States)on page 3-24 for moreinformation.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3-16.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”



later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pull thestitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3-11.



Squeeze the release buttonstogether and move the heightadjuster up or down to the desiredposition.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it up ordown without squeezing the releasebuttons to make sure it has lockedinto position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they

are part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. Safety beltpretensioners can also help tightenthe safety belts in a side crash orrollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash on page 3-17.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed and

properly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

There is one guide, if equipped, foreach outboard passenger position inthe rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage location, which is apocket on the side of the seat.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Storethe comfort guide in its storagelocation, which is a pocket on theside of the seat.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.



A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealer

to have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-11.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3-16.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.



Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.

See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-12.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.



For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Even if you do not have a frontoutboard passenger seat in thevehicle, there is still an active frontalairbag in the right side of theinstrument panel. Do not placecargo in front of this airbag.

{ Warning

Be sure that cargo is not near anairbag. In a crash, an inflatingairbag might force that objecttoward a person. This couldcause severe injury or even

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

death. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3-19 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags are

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

designed to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3-21.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 3-30 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3-32.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-12 for moreinformation.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.



The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the instrumentpanel on the passenger side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

that person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System onpage 3-17. Airbags are designed toinflate if the impact exceeds thespecific airbag system's deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.

It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.



A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from the

inflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3-19.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in the

first and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3-21.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot for



several minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3-22.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after an

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predeterminedthreshold. You can lock the doors,turn off the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers by usingthe controls for those features. Youmust first, however, turn the ignitionkey to the following ignition switchpositions:

1. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

2. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.



Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13-13 and Event DataRecorders on page 13-14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean that

an airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystem (United States)The vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF will bevisible during the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator (UnitedStates) on page 5-12.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seatand safety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag should beallowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in a correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, childrenage 12 and under should besecured in a rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.



{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. The front outboard passengerseat is occupied by a smallerperson, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator (United States) onpage 5-12.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson’s seating posture andbody build. Everyone in thevehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3-44 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3-46.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3-2.



6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child restraint in arear seat position in the vehicle,and check with your dealer.

If no rear seat is available, donot install a child restraint in thisvehicle.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:


2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

If the shoulder portion of the beltis pulled out all the way, thechild restraint locking feature willbe engaged. This mayunintentionally cause the

passenger sensing system toturn the airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, let the belt go back allthe way and start again withoutpulling the belt out all the way.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.



Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-28 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. To

purchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-11.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. The



operation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing anyparts of the front seats, safety belts,the airbag sensing and diagnosticmodule, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, any of the airbag modules,ceiling or pillar garnish trim, frontsensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on top

of the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System(United States) on page 3-24.

The vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags. See Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10-54 foradditional important information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicleis modified for any other reason, callCustomer Assistance. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices onpage 13-3.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-12.

{ Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-19. See yourdealer for service.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-12.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide, if available.See “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belton page 3-12. If a comfort guideis not available, or if theshoulder belt still does not reston the shoulder, then return tothe booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-12.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked and

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

tightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safetybelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint in

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

the front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Selection of a particular restraintshould take into consideration notonly the child's weight, height, andage but also whether or not therestraint will be compatible with themotor vehicle in which it willbe used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are many differentmodels available. When purchasinga child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motorvehicle.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular childrestraint.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-38 formore information. Children can be

endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United States,Certified Child Passenger SafetyTechnicians (CPSTs) are availableto inspect and demonstrate how tocorrectly use and install childrestraints. In the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.



Whenever possible, children age12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front. This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

far back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System(United States) on page 3-24 foradditional information.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or child



restraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in the

vehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. Besure to read and follow theinstructions for the child restraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is near the top tetheranchors.

The top tether anchors are on theback of the rear seatback. Be sureto use an anchor on the same sideof the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3-36 foradditional information.



Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors or withthe safety belt, the child restraintwill not be able to protect the childcorrectly. In a crash, the childcould be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ Warning

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

shoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused safety beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.



{ Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-36.

This system is designed to makethe installation of child restraintseasier. When using lower anchors,do not use the vehicle's safety belts.Instead, use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments to

secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:



If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and you

are using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route thetether under the headrest orhead restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properly

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

secure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-38 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the safetybelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as theinstructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3-36.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.





4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)The vehicle has airbags. A rear seatis a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-36.

In addition, the vehicle may have apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System (UnitedStates) on page 3-24 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator(United States) on page 5-12 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System(United States) on page 3-24 foradditional information.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, the off indicatoron the passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator (United States) onpage 5-12.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.





5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-38 for more information.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator, if equipped, will come onand stay on when the vehicle isstarted.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a Child



Restraint ” under PassengerSensing System (United States) onpage 3-24 for more information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Instrument Panel StorageThe vehicle has a storage area tothe left of the steering wheel. Pulldown on the handle to access.

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on thelever. If the glove box has a lock,use the key to lock and unlock it.

CupholdersThere are cupholders in the centerconsole and in the second row seatarmrest.

Pull down the armrest to access thecupholders.

Front Storage

For vehicles with a storage arealocated under the front passengerseat, lift up on the end of the trayand pull it forward to access it.

Sunglasses StorageThis vehicle may have a sunglassesstorage compartment near therearview mirror. Push the coverto open.


4-2 Storage

Center Console Storage

This vehicle has a center consolewith an upper and lower storagearea. To access the upper storagearea pull on the latch to lift thearmrest. Slide the cupholder back toaccess a larger storage areaunderneath.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, useit to cover items in the rear of thevehicle.

To remove the cover and remove itfrom the vehicle, pull both endstoward each other. To reinstall,place each end of the cover in theholes behind the rear seat.

Cargo Tie-DownsFour cargo tie‐downs are located inthe rear compartment of the vehicle.The tie-downs can be used tosecure small loads.

Cargo ManagementSystemIf the vehicle has a cargomanagement system in the rear ofthe vehicle, it will have rails with

adapters and hooks. These areused to hold the net and meshpocket.

The adapters are used to hold thenet. Slide the adapters to thedesired location on the upper andlower rail and turn the handle up tolock it in place. Compress the rodsof the net and insert them into thecorresponding openings of theadapter. The longer rod is for theupper adapter.


Storage 4-3

The hooks hold the mesh pocket. Toinsert a hook on the rail, place thehook in the upper groove of the railand press it into the lower groove.

Convenience NetFor vehicles with a convenience net,located in the rear, use it to storesmall loads as far forward aspossible. The net should not beused to store heavy loads.

Roof Rack System

{ Warning

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

If equipped with a roof rack it can beused to load items. For roof racksthat do not have crossrails included,GM Certified crossrails can bepurchased as an accessory. Seeyour dealer for additionalinformation.

{ Caution

Loading cargo on the roof rackthat weighs more than 75 kg(165 lb) or hangs over the rear orsides of the vehicle may damagethe vehicle. Load cargo so that itrests evenly between thecrossrails, making sure to fastencargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers;otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace.


4-4 Storage

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-10.

Check that all cargo is securelyfastened to prevent damage or losswhile driving.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator (United States) . . . . 5-12

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Service Vehicle SoonLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

All-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-18Power Steering WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-19Traction Control System(TCS) Warning Light . . . . . . . 5-19

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-21Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22

Low Washer Fluid WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Brake System Messages . . . . 5-28Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-29Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-30Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-31Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-31Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-31Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-33Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-33


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-34Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-35

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-41Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

+ / − (Next/Previous): Press andrelease to go to the next or theprevious preset radio station or CDtrack.



J / 0 (Call/Mute): For vehicles withBluetooth® and OnStar®, press andhold to interact with those systems.See Bluetooth on page 7-19 or“OnStar,” if equipped. Press andrelease to mute the system. Press itagain to turn the sound back on.

K (End Call): Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

v + or v − (Volume): Move thethumbwheel up or down to increaseor to decrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on theright side of the steering column.

Move the lever up or down to selectthe wiper speed.

8 (Mist): Single wipe, briefly movethe lever down. The lever returns toits starting position when released.For several wipes, hold thelever down.

9 (Off): Turns the windshieldwipers off.

3 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Sets a delay between wipes. Movethe switch on top of the lever left forless frequent wipes or right for morefrequent wipes.

a (Low): Slow wipes.

1 (High): Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10-25.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.

Rainsense™

{ Caution

Going through an automatic carwash with the wipers on candamage them. Turn the wipers offwhen going through an automaticcar wash.



If equipped with Rainsense™windshield wipers, the moisturesensor is next to the inside rearviewmirror and is mounted on thewindshield. When active, thesesensors are able to detect moistureon the windshield and automaticallyturn on the wipers.

To turn on the Rainsense feature,the wipers must be set to one of thefive delay settings on the lever.Each of the five settings adjusts thesensitivity of the sensor.

Since different drivers have differentsetting preferences, it isrecommended that the mid-rangesetting (position 3) be used initially.For more wipes, select the highersettings; for fewer wipes, select thelower settings located closer to theoff position on the lever.

The sensor automatically controlsthe frequency of the wipes from theoff setting to the high speed settingaccording to the weather conditions.

The wipers can be left in aRainsense mode even when it is notraining.

Windshield Washer

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Pull the windshield wiper lever tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers. The wipers willcontinue until the lever is releasedor the maximum wash time isreached.

Rear Window Wiper/WasherThe rear wiper and rear wash buttonis on the instrument panel above theclimate control system.

= (Rear Wiper/Washer): Press towash and wipe the rear window.

The rear window washer uses thesame reservoir as the windshieldwasher. Check the windshieldwasher reservoir level if the frontwindshield can be worked, but nofluid is sprayed when the rearwasher is activated. See WasherFluid on page 10-20.

5 (Delay): Press to turn thedelayed wiping on or off.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone

The zone is set to Zone 8 uponleaving the factory. Your dealer willset the correct zone for yourlocation.

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will be



necessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving. Onlyset it when the vehicle is inP (Park).

Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TO SETCOMPASS ZONE: ## displays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press and hold the set/resetbutton to scroll through andselect the appropriatevariance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel button untilthe vehicle heading, forexample, N for North, isdisplayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CB orcell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magnetic



note pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass is set tothe variance zone in which thevehicle is located. See“Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, seats, etc.during the calibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press the set/reset button tostart the compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING COMPASS:TURN IN CIRCLES. Drive thevehicle in tight circles at lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph) to completethe calibration. The DIC willdisplay COMPASSCALIBRATION COMPLETE for afew seconds when thecalibration is complete. The DICdisplay will then return to theprevious menu.

ClockTo set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.Press O to turn the radio on.

2. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD,and YYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) display.

3. Press the softkey below any oneof the tabs to be changed.

4. To increase the time or date doone of the following:. Press the softkey below the

selected tab.

. Press ¨ SEEK, or\ FWD.

. Turn f clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date doone of the following:

. Press © SEEK ors REV.

. Turn f counterclockwise.

The date does not automaticallydisplay. To see the date press Hwhile the radio is on. The date withdisplay times out after a fewseconds and goes back to thenormal radio and time display.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press H and then the softkeybelow the forward arrow label toselect the time 12H and 24H,



and the date MM/DD/YYYY(month, day, and year) andDD/MM/YYYY (day, month, andyear) display.

2. Press the softkey below thedesired option.

3. Press H again to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The power outlets are inside thecenter floor console, on the rear ofthe center floor console, and in therear cargo compartment.

The power outlet located in the rearcargo area is powered at all times.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

{ Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum20 amp rating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-47.

{ Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Cluster Shown, Metric Cluster Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in kilometers per hour (km/h)and miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

Press the trip odometer reset stemon the cluster to switch between theodometer, trip odometer A, and tripodometer B.

To reset each trip odometer to zero,press and hold the trip odometerreset stem. Only the trip odometerthat is currently displayed will bereset.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

{ Caution

If the engine is operated with therpm’s in the warning area at thehigh end of the tachometer, thevehicle could be damaged, andthe damage would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the rpm’sin the warning area.

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English



When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates how much fuel isleft in the tank.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There is stilla little fuel left, but the fuel tankshould be refilled soon. See LowFuel Warning Light on page 5-21 formore information.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of thesemeans the fuel gauge is not workingproperly:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actually

took a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, but it goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

For fuel tank capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There may be a passenger safetybelt reminder light near thepassenger airbag status indicator.See Passenger Sensing System(United States) on page 3-24.



For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt reminder light,when the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind passengers to fasten theirsafety belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle continues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off the

reminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3-17.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5-33.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator (United States)The vehicle has the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System (United States) onpage 3-24 for important safety



information. The instrument panelhas a passenger airbag statusindicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light the words ON and OFF, forseveral seconds as a system check.Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light eitherthe word ON or the word OFF, to letyou know the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag is allowedto inflate.

If the word OFF is lit on the airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.



MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9-15.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that theOBD II system has detected aproblem and diagnosis and servicemight be required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is continually drivenwith this light on, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system of the vehicle orthe replacement of the originaltires with other than those of thesame Tire Performance Criteria(TPC) can affect the vehicle'semission controls and can causethis light to come on.Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions and



could damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-38. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Fuel on page 9-36.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).



The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This can

happen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Service Vehicle SoonLight

The service vehicle soon lightcomes on if a condition exists thatmay require the vehicle to be takenin for service.

If the light comes on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

Metric English

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.



When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light may also comeon when the parking brake is set.The light stays on if the parkingbrake does not fully release. If itstays on after the parking brake isfully released, there is a brakeproblem. Have the brake systeminspected immediately.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.

If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-70.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

The parking brake status lightcomes on when the Electric ParkingBrake (EPB) is applied. If the lightcontinues flashing after the EPB isreleased, or while driving, there is aproblem with the EPB system.A SERVICE PARKING BRAKEmessage may also display in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Brake System Messages onpage 5-28.

The brake system warning light mayalso come on when the EPB is set.Both lights will stay on until the EPBis released.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

The parking brake warning lightshould come on briefly when theignition is placed in ON/RUN. If itdoes not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn if there isa problem.

If this light comes on, there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the EPBsystem to work at a reduced level.The vehicle can still be driven, butshould be taken to a dealer as soonas possible. See Parking Brake onpage 9-26.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light should come on brieflywhen the vehicle is in ON/RUN. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

If the ABS warning light stays onlonger than a few seconds after thevehicle is in ON/RUN, or comes onand stays on while driving, tryresetting the system. To reset thesystem:

1. While driving, pull over when it issafe to do so.

2. Place the vehicle in P (Park).


4. Restart the vehicle.

If the ABS warning light remains onafter resetting the system or comeson again while driving, the vehicleneeds service. If the ABS warninglight is on, but the regular brakesystem warning light is not on, theantilock brakes are not workingproperly, but the regular brakes arestill functioning. Have the vehicleserviced right away. If both brakelights are on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes, and there is aproblem with the regular brakes aswell. Have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-70.

All-Wheel-Drive Light

For vehicles with theAll-Wheel-Drive light, it comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned toON/RUN.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

This light comes on when there is amalfunction in the All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) system.

This light flashes when the AWDsystem is temporarily disabled.

For more information see All-WheelDrive on page 9-24.

This light comes on when thecompact spare tire is installed. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 10-65for more information.



Power Steering WarningLight

This light comes on briefly when theignition is turned to ON/RUN as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If this light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, the system may not beworking. If this happens, see yourdealer for service.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

The StabiliTrak light comes onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

This light flashes while theStabiliTrak system or the TractionControl System (TCS) is working.The light comes on when there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-28.

Traction Control System(TCS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

It also comes on when the TractionControl System (TCS) has beenturned off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-28.



Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicatorlight goes off.

{ Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Drivingwith this light on can damage theengine and it may not be covered

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

by the vehicle warranty. SeeEngine Overheating onpage 10-18.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10-18.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5-33. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-44.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-47.



Fuel Economy Light

For vehicles with the fuel economymode, this light comes on when theeco (economy) button, located onthe center console near the shiftlever, is pressed. Press the buttonagain to turn off the light and exitthe fuel economy mode.

See Fuel Economy Mode onpage 9-23 for more information.

Low Fuel Warning Light

The low fuel warning light comes onbriefly when the vehicle is started.

This light also comes on when thefuel level is low. When fuel is added,the light should go off. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem.

This light is also used to indicate thestatus of the anti-theft alarm systemwhen the ignition is turned off. Thelight will flash rapidly if the alarmsystem is arming and one or moreof the monitored entry points is notclosed. The light will stay on if thealarm is arming and all entry pointsare closed.

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Vehicle Alarm System onpage 2-9.

Reduced Engine PowerLight



The reduced engine power lightshould come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

This light, along with the malfunctionindicator lamp, displays when anoticeable reduction in the vehicle'sperformance occurs.

The vehicle can be driven at areduced speed when the reducedengine power light is on butacceleration and speed might bereduced. If this light stays on, seeyour dealer as soon as possible fordiagnosis and repair.

High-Beam On Light

The high-beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-2 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6-4 for moreinformation.

Low Washer FluidWarning Light

The low washer fluid warning lightcomes on when the windshieldwasher fluid is low. See WasherFluid on page 10-20 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on when the cruisecontrol is set.



This light goes out when the cruisecontrol is canceled. See CruiseControl on page 9-30.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed.

Gate Ajar Light

If the gate ajar light comes on, theliftgate is not completely closed.Driving with the liftgate open cancause carbon monoxide (CO) toenter the vehicle.

See Engine Exhaust on page 9-20for more information.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The vehicle has a DIC.

All information appears in the DICdisplay in the instrument cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICdisplays the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also displays the compassdirection, outside air temperature,and shift position indicator at the topof the DIC display. If there is aproblem with the system thatcontrols the temperature display, thenumbers will be replaced withdashes. If this occurs, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.



If an abnormal temperature readingis displayed for an extended periodof time, consult your dealer. Undercertain circumstances, especiallywhen the engine is idling, a delay inupdating the temperature display isnormal.

See Compass on page 5-4 andAutomatic Transmission onpage 9-21.

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons on the instrumentpanel, below the exterior lampscontrol.

DIC Buttons

There are trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometer, fuel range, average fueleconomy, fuel used, and elapsedtime. Some vehicles also displayinstantaneous fuel economy. Thecompass and outside temperaturewill also be shown in the display.The temperature will be shown in °Cor °F depending on the unitsselected.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life, rearpark assist, units, tire pressurereadings and tire pressure sensorlearning for vehicles with the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS),compass zone setting, compassrecalibration on vehicles with thisfeature, coolant temperature, andbattery voltage.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on the vehicle. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-35.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

Odometer

Press3 until ODOMETERdisplays. This display shows thedistance the vehicle has beendriven in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi). Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will alsodisplay the odometer.

To switch between metric andEnglish measurements, see “Units”later in this section.

Trip Odometer

Press3 until TRIP A or TRIP Bdisplays. This display shows thecurrent distance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi) since



the last reset for the trip odometer.Pressing the trip odometer resetstem will also display the tripodometer.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing V whilethe trip odometer is displayed. Youcan also reset the trip odometerwhile it is displayed by pressing andholding the trip odometerreset stem.

Fuel Range

Press3 until RANGE displays.This display shows the approximatenumber of remaining kilometers (km)or miles (mi) the vehicle can bedriven without refueling. This displaywill show LOW if the fuel levelis low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.

For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving. Fuelrange cannot be reset.

If the vehicle is low on fuel, theFUEL LEVEL LOW message will bedisplayed. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5-31.

Average Fuel Economy

Press3 until AVERAGE FUELECONOMY displays. This displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or kilometers per liter (km/L) ormiles per gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the approximateaverage fuel economy that thevehicle has right now, and willchange as driving conditions

change. This number is calculatedbased on the number of L/100 km(km/L) (mpg) recorded since the lasttime this menu item was reset. Toreset the AVERAGE FUELECONOMY, press and hold V. Thedisplay will show zero.

Fuel Used

Press3 until FUEL USEDdisplays. This display shows thenumber of liters (L) or gallons (gal)of fuel used since the last reset ofthis menu item. To reset the fuelused information, press and hold Vwhile FUEL USED is displayed.

Elapsed Time

Press3 until ELAPSED TIMEdisplays. This display can be usedas a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/reset button while ELAPSED TIMEis displayed. The display will showthe amount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset, notincluding time the ignition is off.



Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even ifanother display is being shown onthe DIC. The timer will record up to99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press V brieflywhile ELAPSED TIME is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold V while ELAPSED TIME isdisplayed.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

If the vehicle has this display, press3 until INSTANT FUELECONOMY displays. This displayshows the approximate current fueleconomy at a particular momentand will change frequently as drivingconditions change. This displayshows the approximateinstantaneous fuel economy in litersper 100 kilometers (L/100 km) ormiles per gallon (mpg). Unlikeaverage fuel economy, this displaycannot be reset.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Oil Life

PressT until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If you see99%OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you tochange the oil on a scheduleconsistent with the drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-30. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See Engine

Oil on page 10-8. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2. Wheneverthe oil is changed, the Oil LifeSystem will need to be reset. Toreset the system through the DIC,press and hold V while this displayis shown. When the system is reset,the display will show 100%OIL LIFEREMAINING.

Park Assist

If the vehicle has the Rear ParkingAssist (RPA) system, pressT untilPARK ASSIST displays. Thisdisplay allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press V to select betweenON or OFF. The RPA systemautomatically turns back on aftereach vehicle start. When the RPAsystem is turned off and the vehicleis shifted out of P (Park), the DICwill display the PARK ASSIST OFFmessage as a reminder that the



system has been turned off. SeeObject Detection System Messageson page 5-32 and Parking Assist onpage 9-32.

Units

PressT until UNITS displays. Thisdisplay allows you to select betweenmetric or English units ofmeasurement. Once in this display,press V to select between METRICor ENGLISH units. All of the vehicleinformation will then be displayed inthe unit of measurement selected.

Coolant Temperature

PressT until the coolanttemperature is displayed. Thetemperature will be shown in °C or°F depending on the units selected.

If the coolant temperature displayshows dashes instead of a value,there may be a problem with thevehicle. If this happens often, seeyour dealer for service.

Battery Voltage

PressT until the battery voltage isdisplayed.

If the battery voltage display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with the vehicle.If this happens often, see yourdealer for service.

Tire Pressure

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either kilopascals (kPa) orpounds per square inch (psi). PressT until the DIC displays FRONTTIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. PressT again until theDIC displays REAR TIRES kPa(PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressurecondition is detected by the systemwhile driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in aspecific tire will appear in the

display. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-44 and Tire Messages onpage 5-33.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with the vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

For information on relearning tirepositions see “TPMS SensorMatching Process” under TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-47.

Compass Zone Setting

This display allows for setting thecompass zone. See Compass onpage 5-4.

Compass Recalibration

This display allows for calibratingthe compass. See Compass onpage 5-4.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.



Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by thedriver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you can pressany of the DIC buttons, or the tripodometer reset stem on theinstrument cluster, to acknowledgethat you received the messages andto clear them from the display.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. Take any messages thatappear on the display seriously andremember that clearing themessages will only make themessages disappear, not correct theproblem.

You will find the possible messagesthat can be displayed and someinformation about them grouped bysubject in the following information.

Brake System Messages

PARK BRAKE RELEASED

This message displays when theElectric Parking Brake (EPB) hasbeen released from the set position.See Parking Brake on page 9-26.

PARK BRAKE SET

This message displays when theElectric Parking Brake (EPB) hasbeen applied to the set position.See Parking Brake on page 9-26.

RELEASE PARK BRAKESWITCH

This message displays if the ElectricParking Brake (EPB) switch ispulled while the vehicle is moving.See Parking Brake on page 9-26.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem or when the brake fluid levelis low. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-16. Have the brakesystem serviced by your dealer assoon as possible.

SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

This message displays if a problemis detected with the Electric ParkingBrake (EPB) system. See ParkingBrake on page 9-26.

STEP ON BRAKE TORELEASE PARK BRAKE

This message displays if you try torelease the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) without first pressing thebrake pedal. See Parking Brake onpage 9-26.



Compass Messages

CALIBRATING COMPASS:TURN IN CIRCLES

This message displays whencalibrating the compass. Drive thevehicle in circles at less than8 km/h (5 mph) to complete thecalibration. See Compass onpage 5-4.

COMPASS CALIBRATIONCOMPLETE

This message displays when thecompass calibration is complete.See Compass on page 5-4.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message will display when thecruise control is set and it will showthe speed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9-30 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver door is not closed properly.Close the door completely.

HOOD OPEN

If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, this message displaysalong with a chime when the hood isnot closed properly. Make sure thatthe hood is closed completely. SeeHood on page 10-3. This messagedisplays while the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message andto clear it from the screen.

This message continues to displayfor two seconds if it has not beenacknowledged when the engine isturned off. The message comesback on for two seconds if it hasbeen acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when theengine is turned off. If the conditionstill exists, the message reappearswhen the engine is turned on.

LIFTGATE OPEN

This message will display when theliftgate is not closed properly. Closethe liftgate completely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thepassenger doors are not closedproperly. Close the door completely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C (AirConditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor is automatically turnedoff. When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the A/C operationautomatically resumes. You cancontinue to drive the vehicle.



ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

This message displays along with acontinuous chime when the enginehas overheated. Stop and turn theengine off immediately to avoidsevere engine damage. See EngineOverheating on page 10-18.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL NOW

This message displays whenservice is urgently required. Thisindicates that the oil life remaining isless than one percent and the oilcannot work correctly to avoidengine wear or damage. See your

dealer. See Engine Oil on page 10-8and Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Acknowledging this message willnot reset the OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplay. That must be done at theOIL LIFE screen. See “Oil Life”under Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5-23 and Engine OilLife System on page 10-10.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when oil liferemaining is between one andfive percent and service is requiredfor the vehicle. See your dealer. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-8 andMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Acknowledging this message willnot reset the OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplay. That must be done at theOIL LIFE screen. See “Oil Life”under Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5-23 and Engine OilLife System on page 10-10.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil on page 10-8.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

{ Caution

If you drive the vehicle while theengine oil pressure is low, severeengine damage may occur. Stopthe vehicle as soon as possible.Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. See Engine Oil onpage 10-8.

This message displays when thevehicle's engine oil pressure is low.



Stop the vehicle immediately, asengine damage can result fromdriving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possiblewhen this message is displayed.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fueltank as soon as possible. See FuelGauge on page 5-10 and Filling theTank on page 9-38 for moreinformation.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the malfunction indicator lampon the instrument cluster if thevehicle's fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-14. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 9-38. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOBBATTERY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-2.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message displays when theautomatic headlamp system isactivated by turning the exteriorlamps control to AUTO.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message displays when theautomatic headlamp system hasbeen turned off.



Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASST (Assist)BLOCKED SEE OWNERSMANUAL

This message displays if there issomething interfering with the RearParking Assist (RPA) system. SeeParking Assist on page 9-32.

PARK ASSIST OFF

After the vehicle has been started,this message displays to remind thedriver that the Rear Parking Assist(RPA) system has been turned off.Press the set/reset button or the tripodometer reset stem toacknowledge this message andclear it from the DIC display. SeeParking Assist on page 9-32.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Rear ParkingAssist (RPA) system. Do not use

this system to help you park. SeeParking Assist on page 9-32. Seeyour dealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak®

system. A warning light alsoappears on the instrument cluster.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-28.

If this message turns on while youare driving, pull off the road as soonas possible and stop carefully. Tryresetting the system by turning theignition off and then back on. If thismessage still stays on or turns backon again while you are driving, thevehicle needs service. Have thesystem inspected by your dealer assoon as possible.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isnot functioning properly. A warninglight also appears on the instrumentcluster. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-28. Have the TCS servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

STABILITRAK OFF

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when you turn offthe StabiliTrak, or when the stabilitycontrol has been automaticallydisabled. To limit wheel spin andrealize the full benefits of thestability enhancement system, youshould normally leave StabiliTrakon. However, you should turnStabiliTrak off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snowand you want to rock the vehicle toattempt to free it, or if you aredriving in extreme off-roadconditions and require more wheelspin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on



page 9-9. To turn the StabiliTraksystem on or off, see TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-28.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) turnsoff. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-28.

This message only displays whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN anddisappears after 10 seconds, unlessit is acknowledged or an urgentwarning appears.

Any of the following conditions maycause the TCS to turn off:. The TCS is turned off by

pressing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-28.

. The battery is low.

. There is a TCS failure. See yourdealer for service.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) turnson. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-28 formore information.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays when thereis a problem with the airbag system.Have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-12 formore information.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE A/C (AirConditioning) SYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem detected in the airconditioning system. Have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions-related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

Tire Messages

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires needs to be checked.This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatewhich tire needs to be checked. Youcan receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the set/reset button. If a tirepressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Havethe tire pressures checked and setto those shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tires



on page 10-37, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-44. The DIC also showsthe tire pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-23. If the tire pressure is low,the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on. See Tire Pressure Lighton page 5-20.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORINGSYSTEM

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5-20. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10-47 formore information. If the warningcomes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TPMS. Seeyour dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the TPMSis re-learning the tire positions onthe vehicle. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Rotation on page 10-50,Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 10-46, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-44 for more information.

Transmission Messages

CHANGE TRANSMISSIONFLUID

{ Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damagesmay not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

automatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

This message displays when the lifeof the transmission fluid has expiredand it should be changed. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2 and RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11-12for the proper fluid and changeintervals.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer for service.



TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

{ Caution

Do not drive the vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating,or the transmission can bedamaged. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty.

This message displays along with achime if the transmission fluid in thevehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears and the chimestops when the fluid temperaturereaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds as a reminder to turn off theturn signal if you drive the vehiclefor more than about 1.2 km(0.75 mile) with a turn signal on.See Turn and Lane-Change Signalson page 6-3 for more information.

VehiclePersonalizationThe vehicle may have customizationcapabilities that allow you toprogram certain features to onepreferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on the vehicle. Onlythe options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen the vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from theirdefault state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.



Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press U to scroll through theavailable customizable options.

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press U until the PRESS V TODISPLAY IN ENGLISH screenappears on the DIC display. PressV once to display all DIC messagesin English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press U until the PRESS V TOSET DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

PORTUGUESE: All messages willappear in Portuguese.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press V whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle's doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2-6.

Press U until PRESS V TO SETAUTO DOOR LOCK appears on theDIC display. Press V once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press U to scroll through thefollowing settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.





AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2-6.

Press U until PRESS V TO SETAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press V once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press U to scroll through thefollowing settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER DOOR AT KEY OUT:Only the driver door will unlockwhen the key is taken out of theignition.

DRIVER DOOR IN PARK: Only thedriver door will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

ALL DOORS AT KEY OUT: All ofthe doors will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

ALL DOORS IN PARK (default):All of the doors will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-2.

Press U until PRESS V TO SETREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press V once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press U to scroll through thefollowing settings:

VERIFICATION OFF: There will beno feedback when you press Q onthe RKE transmitter.

VERIFICATION LIGHTS ONLY:The exterior lamps will flash whenyou press Q on the RKE transmitter.

VERIFICATION HORN ONLY: Thehorn will sound on the second pressof Q on the RKE transmitter.

VERIFICATION HORN & LIGHTS(default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press Q on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen Q is pressed again withinfive seconds of the previouscommand.



VERIFICATION NO CHANGE: Nochange will be made to this feature.The current setting will remain.


REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-2.

Press U until PRESS V TO SETREMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appearson the DIC display. Press V once toaccess the settings for this feature.

Then press U to scroll through thefollowing settings:

VERIF LIGHTS OFF: The exteriorlamps will not flash when you pressK on the RKE transmitter.

VERIF LIGHTS ON (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress K on the RKE transmitter.

VERIF NO CHANGE: No changewill be made to this feature. Thecurrent setting will remain.


DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle's doors will be delayed.When locking the doors with thepower door lock switch and a dooris open, this feature will delaylocking the doors until five secondsafter the last door is closed. You willhear three chimes to signal that thedelayed locking feature is in use.

The key must be out of the ignitionfor this feature to work. You cantemporarily override delayed lockingby pressing the power door lockswitch twice or the lock button onthe RKE transmitter twice. SeeDelayed Locking on page 2-6.

Press U until PRESS V TO SETDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press V once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press U to scroll through thefollowing settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed.





EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when itis dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press U until PRESS V TO SETEXIT LIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressU to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

10 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for10 seconds.

30 SECONDS: The exterior lampswill stay on for 30 seconds.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlamps turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

Press U until PRESS V TO SETAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press V once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press U to scroll through thefollowing settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lamps will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lamps will remain on for20 seconds or until Q on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, or the vehicleis no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-2.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press U until PRESS V TO SETCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press V once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press U to scroll through thefollowing settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.



LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


REMOTE START

If the vehicle has this feature, itallows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2-4.

Press U until PRESS V TO SETREMOTE START appears on theDIC display. Press V once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press U to scroll through thefollowing settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press U until PRESS V TORESTORE DEFAULTS appears onthe DIC display. Press V once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press U to scroll through thefollowing settings:

RESTORE (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

NO CHANGE: The customizationfeatures will not be set to theirfactory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press U until PRESS V TO EXITFEATURE SETTINGS appears inthe DIC display. Press V once toexit the menu.



If you do not exit, pressing U againwill return you to the beginning ofthe feature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.

. The3 orT DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40-second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. Theseinstructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read these instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.



Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quicker andmore accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons with theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one of thethree Universal Remote systembuttons to be used to operatethe garage door. Do not releaseeither button until the indicatorlight changes from a slow to arapid flash. Then release bothbuttons.

Some garage door openers mayrequire substitution of Step 2with the procedure under “RadioSignals for Canada and SomeGate Operators” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicator lightand garage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on

continuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, then

programming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light doesnot come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press maybe required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.



Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smart buttoninside the garage on the garagedoor opener receiver. The nameand color of the button may varyby manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote system buttonfor two seconds, then release it.If the garage door does notmove or the lamp on the garagedoor opener receiver does not

flash, press and hold the samebutton a second time fortwo seconds, then release it.Again, if the door does not moveor the garage door lamp doesnot flash, press and hold thesame button a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming help,call 1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long

enough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.



Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal HomeRemote

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Home Remote button forat least half of a second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons

The programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold down the twooutside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Home RemoteButton

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Home Remote buttons,repeat the programming instructionsearlier in this section, beginning withStep 2.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

9 (Off): Turns off the exteriorlamps. The knob returns to theAUTO position after it is released.

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns the exterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

The current status of the AUTOsystem is displayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display.See Vehicle Reminder Messages onpage 5-35.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.

Lamps On Reminder

A warning chime sounds, if thedriver door is opened while theignition is off and the lamps are on.

Wiper-Activated Headlamps

The headlamps and parking lampsturn on automatically if the exteriorlamp control is set in the AUTOposition and the windshield wipersare turned on and have completedeight wipe cycles.


6-2 Lighting

When the ignition is turned off, thewiper-activated headlampsimmediately turn off. They also turnoff if the windshield wiper control isturned off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Push the turn signallever away from you to turn the highbeams on.

Pull the lever toward you to return tolow beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever toward you, andrelease.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)On vehicles equipped with DRL, thelow-beam headlamps come on indaylight when all the followingconditions are met:. The engine is running,. The exterior lamp control is in

AUTO, and. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

Fully functional DRL are required onall vehicles first sold in Canada.

When the DRL are on, thelow-beam headlamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarker lamps,instrument panel lights, and otherlamps will not be on.

When the exterior lamp control isturned to the headlamp position, theregular headlamps will come on.The other lamps that come on withthe headlamps will also come on.

When the headlamps are turned off,the regular lamps also turn off, andthe low-beam headlamps turn on.

The regular headlamp systemshould be used when needed.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theheadlamps come on automatically.


Lighting 6-3

Do not cover the light sensor on topof the instrument panel or theheadlamps will come on when theyare not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for the

lamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control to9or; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble.

Press| again to turn theflashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash and thenrelease, to signal a lane change.The turn signal flashesautomatically three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.


6-4 Lighting

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have any burned out bulbsreplaced. If a bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block on page 10-34.

Fog Lamps

For vehicles with fog lamps, thebutton is on the instrument panelnext to the exterior lamp control.

# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn thefog lamps on or off.

The fog lamp indicator in theinstrument panel comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The parking lamps or low-beamheadlamps must be on, before thefog lamps can be turned on.

If the exterior lamp control is set toAUTO mode, the parking lamps andlow-beam headlamps come onsimultaneously when the fog lampsare turned on.

When the high-beam headlamps areturned on, the fog lamps turn offautomatically. When the high-beamheadlamps are turned off, the foglamps come on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be on withthe fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThe thumbwheel for this feature ison the left side of the steering wheelnext to the exterior lamp control.

Turn the thumbwheel to the right orleft to brighten or dim the instrumentpanel lights.


Lighting 6-5

Dome Lamps

There are front and rear domelamps in the overhead console andthe headliner.

* (Dome Lamp Override): Pressthe button (1) on the overheadconsole to keep the dome lampsand other interior lamps turned offwhile any door is open. Press thisbutton again to return it to the outposition and the lamps automaticallycome on when any door is opened.

+ (On/Off): Press the button (2) toturn the dome lamps on and offwhile the doors are closed.

Reading Lamps

The front reading lamps are in theoverhead console.

The rear reading lamps are in theheadliner.

To turn the reading lamps on or off,press the button next to each lamp.


6-6 Lighting

Lighting Features

Entry LightingIf the dome lamp override button isin the out position, the lamps insidethe vehicle automatically come onwhen any door is opened, or whenK is pressed on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.After the door is opened, the lampsremain on and stay on for20 seconds after the doors areclosed, or until the key is put intothe ignition and turned to the ACC/ACCESSORY position. The lampswill then gradually dim until they areno longer lit.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. The voltagemay move up or down on thevoltmeter gauge or the voltagedisplay on vehicles with the DriverInformation Center. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories. Normally, these actionsoccur in steps or levels, withoutbeing noticeable.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

If any interior or exterior lamp is lefton and the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off after10 minutes.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Satellite Radio Antenna (IfEquipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Introduction

InfotainmentBase radio information is included inthis manual. See the infotainmentmanual for information on otheravailable infotainment systems.

Read the following pages tobecome familiar with these features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road fortoo long or too often while usingany infotainment feature cancause a crash. You or otherscould be injured or killed. Do notgive extended attention toinfotainment tasks while driving.Limit your glances at the vehicledisplays and focus your attentionon driving. Use voice commandswhenever possible.

The infotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help avoiddistraction by disabling somefunctions when driving. Thesefunctions may gray out when theyare unavailable. Many infotainmentfeatures are also available throughthe instrument cluster and steeringwheel controls.

Before driving:. Become familiar with the

operation, faceplate buttons, andscreen buttons.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlebutton or by using a single voicecommand if equipped withBluetooth phone capability.

See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.


7-2 Infotainment System

To play the infotainment system withthe ignition off, see RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-17.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Overview

1. 4 (Information)

. Press to show informationon the current station ortrack.

2. FAV (Favorites Pages). Press to scroll through the

favorite pages.

3. MENU. Press to open the tone

menu to adjust the bass,midrange, treble, fade, andbalance.



4. Buttons 1 - 6. Save and select favorite

stations.

5. EQ (Equalizer). Press to adjust the

equalizer settings.

6. CAT (Category). Press to display a list of XM

categories, if equipped.

7. f (Tone)

. Press to set the bass ortreble.

. Turn to select radiostations.

8. H (Clock)

. Press to set the clock.

9. BAND. Press to scroll through the

available bands AM, FM,or XM, if equipped.

10. © SEEK

. Seeks the previousstation.

11. ¨ SEEK

. Seeks the next station.

12. DVD Slot

13. O (Power/Volume)

. Press to turn theinfotainment system onor off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

14. s REV (Reverse)

. Press and hold to gobackward fast through atrack.

15. \ FWD (Forward)

. Press and hold to fastforward through a track.

16. CD/AUX. Press to scroll through

selecting the CD or anauxiliary device.

17. Z EJECT

. Press to eject theloaded CD.

Operation

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current FM-RDS, CD, MP3,WMA, or SiriusXM, if equipped.If information is available duringSiriusXM, FM-RDS, CD, MP3,or WMA playback, the song titleinformation displays on the top lineof the display and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, NOINFO displays.



Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press the f knob until the tonecontrol labels display.

2. Continue pressing the f knob tohighlight the desired label,or press the pushbutton underthe desired label.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press the\ FWD, orsREV button.

If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the pushbutton under theBASS, MID, or TREB label for more

than two seconds. A beep soundsand the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, pressthe EQ button until Manual displaysor manually adjust the bass,midrange, or treble by pressing thef knob.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): Toadjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control labels display.

2. Continue pressing the f knob tohighlight the desired label,or press the pushbutton underthe desired label.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thedesired levels are obtained:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press the\ FWD, orsREV button.

To quickly adjust balance or fade tothe middle position, press thepushbutton under the BAL or FADElabel for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjuststo the middle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.

Chime Volume

The radio may be used to adjust thevehicle's chime level. If the radiocan be used to change the volumelevel of the chime, press and holdthe sixth FAV pushbutton with theignition on and the radio power off.



The volume level changes betweenNormal and Loud. The selectedvolume level appears on the radiodisplay.

Removing the radio and notreplacing it with a factory radio orchime module will disable vehiclechimes.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibrated for thevehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer for service.

Locked: This message displayswhen the TheftLock system haslocked up the radio. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The RDS feature is available for useonly on FM stations that broadcastRDS information. This system reliesupon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only workswhen the information is available.While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display. In rare cases,a radio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM or FM.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press to go tothe previous or to the next station.

To scan stations, press and holdeither button for a few seconds untila beep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Presseither button again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal that arein the selected band.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites while thevehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols. See Steering WheelControls on page 5-2.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be stored asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the radio FAVbutton. Press FAV to go through upto six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations availableper page. Each page of favorites



can contain any combination of AM,FM, or SiriusXM stations (ifequipped).

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the pagewhere to store the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix pushbuttons until a beepsounds. When that pushbutton ispressed and released, thestation that was set returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.

To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thepushbutton below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original mainradio screen showing the radiostation frequency labels and tobegin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen number of numberedpages.

Satellite RadioIf equipped with a SiriusXM®

Satellite Radio tuner and a validSiriusXM Satellite subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast to

coast, and in digital-quality sound.A service fee is required to receivethe SiriusXM service. For moreinformation, contact SiriusXM atwww.siriusxm.com or1-866-635-2349 (U.S) andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or SiriusXM. The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press to go tothe previous or to the next stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold ©SEEK or ¨ SEEK until a beepsounds. The radio goes to a station,plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next station. Press eitherarrow again to stop scanning.



Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find SiriusXM stations whenthe radio is in the XM mode. To findSiriusXM channels within a desiredcategory:

1. Press BAND until the XMfrequency displays.

2. Press CAT to display thecategory tabs.

3. To navigate through thecategories, do one of thefollowing:. Press the CAT button.

. Press thes REV or\FWD button.

. Turn the f knob.

4. To tune to a station in theselected category, do one of thefollowing:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press the pushbutton belowthe right or left arrows onthe display.

. Press the © SEEK or ¨SEEK button.

5. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV button orthe BAND button to display thefavorites again.

Removing SiriusXM Categories

Undesired SiriusXM categories canbe removed through the setupmenu. To remove an undesiredcategory:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Press the pushbutton below theXM CAT label.

3. Turn the f knob, then press the© SEEK or ¨ SEEK button or thes REV or\ FWD button todisplay the category to beremoved.

4. Press the pushbutton under theRemove tab until the categoryname along with the wordRemoved displays.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Removed categories can berestored by pressing the pushbuttonunder the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or bypressing the pushbutton under theRestore All label.

Categories cannot be removed oradded while the vehicle is movingfaster than 8 km/h (5 mph).

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites while thevehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols. See Steering WheelControls on page 5-2.



FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six pushbuttonsbelow the radio station frequencylabels and by using the radiofavorites page button (FAV button).Press to go through up to six pagesof favorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or SiriusXMstations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the pagewhere to store the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix pushbuttons until a beepsounds. When that pushbutton ispressed and released, thestation that was set returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.

To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thepushbutton below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original mainradio screen showing the radiostation frequency labels and tobegin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen number of favoritespages.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into the

accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles).Although the radio has a built-inelectronic circuit that automaticallyworks to reduce interference, some



static can occur, especially aroundtall buildings or hills, causing thesound to fade in and out.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base. If themast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

Satellite Radio Antenna(If Equipped)The SiriusXM Satellite Radioantenna is on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

Tall buildings or hills can interferewith satellite radio signals, causingthe sound to fade in and out. Inaddition, traveling or standing underheavy foliage, bridges, garages,or tunnels may cause loss of theSiriusXM signal for a period of time.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the SiriusXM systemmay be affected if the sunroofis open.

Audio Players

CD Player

Playing a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Z EJECT: Press and release toeject the disc that is currentlyplaying. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The disc can be removed.If the disc is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the discautomatically pulls back into theplayer.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press ©SEEK to go to the start of thecurrent track, if more than10 seconds on the track have



played, otherwise goes to theprevious track. Press ¨ SEEK to goto the next track.

If either arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound will be heardat a reduced volume. Release toresume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound will beheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): CD tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order with the randomsetting. To use random, press thesoftkey under the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc displays.Press the softkey again to turn offrandom play.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, Auxiliary,or USB.. When a CD is in the player, the

CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber display.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected or a CD is notinstalled an error message willdisplay.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlight

and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint-free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD; itcould get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised.



{ Caution

If a label is added to a CD, morethan one CD is inserted into theslot at a time, or an attempt ismade to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW Disc

The radio has the capability ofplaying an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW disc. For more informationon how to play an MP3/WMA CD-Ror CD-RW disc, see MP3 onpage 7-11.

CD Messages

Check Disc: Radios with a singleCD player display Check Discand/or eject the CD if an erroroccurs.

Optical Error: The disc wasinserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc wasinserted with an invalid or unknownformat.

Player Error: There are disc LOADor disc EJECT problems.. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

MP3

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc

The radio plays MP3 files that wererecorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.The files can be recorded with thefollowing fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or avariable bit rate. Song title, artistname, and album are available fordisplay by the radio when recordedusing ID3 tags version 1 and 2.



Playing an MP3

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 fileson the CD-R or CD-RW currentlyplaying.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe current track, if more than10 seconds on the CD has played,otherwise goes to the previoustrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingbackward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press ¨ SEEK to go tothe next track. Press ¨ SEEK andhold or press multiple times tocontinue moving forward throughtracks.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey under the Folder label togo to the first track in the previousfolder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey under the Folder label to goto the first track in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly withinan MP3 file. Sound is heard at a

reduced volume. Release to resumeplaying the file. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within an MP3 file. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the randomsetting, the MP3 files on the CD-Ror CD-RW can be listened to inrandom, rather than sequentialorder, on one CD-R/CD-RW. To playMP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RWin random order, press the softkeyunder the RDM label until RandomCurrent Disc displays. Press thesame softkey again to turn offrandom play.

h (Music Navigator): Use themusic navigator feature to play MP3files on the CD-R or CD-RW inorder by artist or album. Press thesoftkey below the music navigatorlabel. The player scans the disc tosort the files by artist and album ID3

tag information. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.The radio can begin playing while itis scanning the disc in thebackground. When the scan isfinished, the CD-R or CD-RWbegins playing again.

Once the disc has been scanned,the player defaults to playing MP3files in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on thesecond line of the display betweenthe arrows. Once all songs by thatartist are played, the player movesto the next artist in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R/CD-RW andbegins playing MP3 files by thatartist. To listen to MP3 files byanother artist, press the softkeybelow either arrow button. The discgoes to the next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey until thedesired artist is displayed.



To change from playback by artist toplayback by album, press thesoftkey below the Sort label. Fromthe sort screen, push one of thesoftkeys below the album label.Press the softkey below the Backlabel to return to the main musicnavigator screen. Now the albumname is displayed on the secondline between the arrows, and songsfrom the current album begin toplay. Once all songs from thatalbum are played, the player movesto the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R/CD-RW andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back label toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

Compressed Audio

The radio also plays discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. Bydefault the radio reads only theuncompressed audio and ignoresthe MP3 files. Pressing the CAT

(category) button toggles betweencompressed and uncompressedaudio format.

MP3 Supported File and FolderStructure

To burn an MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:. Make sure the MP3 files are

recorded on a CD-R orCD-RW disc.

. Do not mix standard audio andMP3 files on one disc.

. The CD player is able to readand play a maximum of50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.

. Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songswhile driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for eachalbum. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.

. Avoid subfolders. The systemcan support up toeight subfolders deep; however,

keep the total number of foldersto a minimum in order to reducethe complexity and confusion intrying to locate a particular folderduring playback.

. Make sure playlists have a .m3uor .wpl extension; other fileextensions may not work.

. Minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist names. Longfile, folder, or playlist names,or a combination of a largenumber of files, folders,or playlists can cause the playerto be unable to play up to themaximum number of files,folders, playlists, or sessions. Toplay a large number of files,folders, playlists or sessions,minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist name. Longnames also take up more spaceon the display, potentially gettingcut off.



. Finalize the audio disc beforeburning it. Trying to add music toan existing disc can cause thedisc not to function in the player.

Playlists can be changed by usingSc andc T , the tune knob,or the SEEK arrows. An MP3 CD-Ror CD-RW that was recorded usingno file folders can also be played.If a CD-R or CD-RW contains morethan the maximum of 50 folders,50 playlists, and 255 files, theplayer can access and navigate upto the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are not accessible.

Root Directory

The root directory of the CD-R orCD-RW is treated as a folder. If theroot directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays as F1ROOT. All files contained directlyunder the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root foldersor files.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfolders andno compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advancesto the next folder in the file structurethat contains compressed audiofiles. The empty folder does notdisplay.

No Folder

When the CD contains onlycompressed files, the files are underthe root folder. The next andprevious folder functions do notdisplay on a CD that was recordedwithout folders or playlists. Whendisplaying the name of the folder,the radio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but nofolders, all files are under the rootfolder. The folder down and upbuttons search playlists (Px) firstand then go to the root folder. Whenthe radio displays the name of thefolder the radio displays ROOT.

Order of Play

Tracks recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has beenplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode is chosen as the defaultdisplay. The new track namedisplays.



File System and Naming

The song name displayed is thesong name contained in the ID3 tag.If the song name is not present inthe ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the file name do not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists created byWinAmp, MusicMatch, or RealJukebox software can be accessed;however, they cannot be editedusing the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

Radios with an auxiliary input jackon the lower right side of thefaceplate can connect to an externalaudio device such as an iPod®,MP3 player, or CD player, for use asanother source for audio listening.This input jack is not an audiooutput; do not plug headphones intothe front auxiliary input jack.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, pressthe radio CD/AUX button to beginplaying audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

For optimal sound quality, increasethe portable audio device's volumeto the loudest level.

It is always best to power theportable audio device through itsown battery while playing.

O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the volume of the portableplayer. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Input DeviceFound displays.



Using the USB Port

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPodusing the radio buttons and knobs.The USB port is in the centerconsole.

USB Support

The USB connector is in the centerconsole, and uses the USB 2.0standard.

USB Supported Devices. USB Flash Drives

. Portable USB Hard Drives

. Fifth generation or later iPod

. iPod nano®

. iPod touch®

. iPod classic®

Not all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple® for properoperation. iPod firmwarecan be updated using the latestiTunes® application. Seewww.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying your iPod,go to www.apple.com/support.

Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files stored on aUSB storage device as well as AACfiles stored on an iPod.

USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to eight folders in depth.

. Up to 65,535 files.

. Folder and file names up to64 bytes.

. Files with an .mp3 or .wma fileextension.

. AAC files stored on an iPod.

. FAT16.

. FAT32.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod

The USB port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portin the center console or on theinstrument panel.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port in the centerconsole. If the vehicle is on and theUSB connection works, OK todisconnect and a GM logo may



appear on the iPod and iPodappears on the radio display. TheiPod music appears on the radio’sdisplay and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and will notcharge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the auxiliaryinput jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” earlier for moreinformation.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs, anddisplay song information on theradio’s display.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume.Releases REV to resume playing.The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The six softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.

j (Pause): Press the softkey belowj to pause the track. The tabappears raised when pause is beingused. Press the softkey below jagain to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theradio display to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.



c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder on theUSB drive. To browse and selectfiles:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the desiredfolder. If there is more then onefolder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 untilthe desired folder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres. Songs. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select thedesired menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through thefolders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.



Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,C, or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): Press thesoftkey below2 to turn shuffleoff. This is the default mode when aUSB storage device or iPod is firstconnected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs/ShuffleSongs): Press the softkey below= orC to shuffle all songs onthe USB storage device or iPod.

C (Shuffle Album): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.

Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.



. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment system.Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth-capable cell phone with aHands-Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).

Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons on the steeringwheel to operate the in-vehicleBluetooth system. See SteeringWheel Controls on page 5-2.

J / 0 (Call/Mute): Press to answerincoming calls, confirm systeminformation, and start speechrecognition.

K (End Call): Press to end a call,reject a call, or cancel an operation.



Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if equipped. See OnStar (ifequipped).

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold J / 0 fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seethe cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.




2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tags inthe Hands-Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.



Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.



Calling 911 Emergency



3. Say “911.”



Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press J / 0 to answer the call.

. PressK to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press J / 0 to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press J / 0 again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. PressK to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.



Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press J / 0.

2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press J / 0 to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

PressK to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press J / 0, andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press J / 0, andthen say “Un-mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press J / 0.

2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press J / 0. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audio

does not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press J / 0. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.



Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate controlsystem functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-2.

1. Fan Control

2. Outside Air


4. Recirculation


6. Air Conditioning



9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. To turn thefan off, turn the knob all the way


8-2 Climate Controls

counterclockwise. In any settingother than off, the fan runscontinuously with the ignition on.There will be some airflownoticeable from the various outletswhen driving, even with the fan inthe off position. To turn off the aircompletely, turn the fan to9 andselect the@ button.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

Select from the following air deliverymodes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andthe floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the windshield.

When this mode is selected, thesystem turns the recirculation modeoff. Recirculation mode cannot beselected while in floor mode. Thishelps prevent window fogging.

- (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the windshield and side windowoutlets. In this mode, the systemturns the recirculation mode off andruns the air conditioning compressorunless the outside air is at or belowfreezing. Recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in defog mode.This helps prevent window fogging.

0 (Defrost): Removes fog or frostfrom the windshield more quickly.Air is directed to the windshield andthe side window outlets. In thismode, the system turns therecirculation mode off automaticallyand runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside air isat or below freezing. Recirculationmode cannot be selected while indefrost mode. This helps preventwindow fogging.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes on toshow that the air conditioning is on.The air conditioning can be selectedin any mode as long as the fan is onand the outside temperature isabove freezing. A flashing indicatorlight indicates that the airconditioning compressor is currentlynot available.

On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool downand helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days,select the following settingstogether:

1. SelectH mode.

2. Select8.



3. Turn the# on.

4. Select the coolest temperatureand highest fan speed.

5. Once the vehicle's interiortemperature is below the outsidetemperature, select recirculationmode for enhanced cooling.

Using these settings together forlong periods of time may cause theair inside the vehicle to become toodry. To prevent this from happening,after the air inside of the vehicle hascooled, turn the recirculationmode off.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

8 (Outside Air): Press to turnthe outside air mode on. Anindicator light comes on to showthat outside air is on. Air fromoutside the vehicle will circulatethroughout the vehicle. The outside

air mode can be used with allmodes, but it cannot be used withthe recirculation mode. Pressing thisbutton will cancel therecirculation mode.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation mode. Anindicator light comes on to showthat recirculation is on. This moderecirculates and helps to quicklycool or heat the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle. Avoid using therecirculation mode during highperiods of humidity and cool outsidetemperatures since this may resultin increased window fogging.If window fogging is experienced,select the defrost mode.

Recirculation mode is not availablein floor, defog, or defrost modes andwill shut off automatically andchange to outside air. The indicatorwill flash if the button is selected inany of these modes. This helps

prevent window fogging andmoisture building up inside thevehicle.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is inON/RUN.

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window is activated.

The rear window defogger stays onfor approximately 10 minutes afterthe button is pressed, unless theignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.If turned on again, the defogger onlyruns for approximately five minutesbefore turning off again. At highervehicle speeds, the defogger may



stay on continuously. The defoggercan also be turned off by turning offthe engine.

{ Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject on the inside rear windowcan damage the antenna ordefogger. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not stick anything to the rearwindow.

L or M (Heated Front Seats, IfEquipped): Press to heat the driveror passenger seat cushion andseatback. To turn off, press thebutton until the indicator lights turnoff. See Heated Front Seats onpage 3-6.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

For vehicles with the remote startfeature, when it is activated, theclimate control system heats andcools the inside of the vehicle usingthe modes that were set before thevehicle was turned off.



Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system. If equipped with remote start, the climate control systemfunctions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation on page 2-2.

1. Fan Control

2. Outside Air


4. Recirculation


6. Air Conditioning



Automatic Operation

This climate control systemautomatically maintains the desiredtemperature inside the vehicle. Do

not cover the sensor on the top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, or the sensor grillebelow the climate control faceplate.These two sensors help regulate theinside air temperature.

AUTO (Automatic Fan): Turn thefan knob to AUTO for the system toautomatically adjust the fan speedto reach the desired insidetemperature.

Temperature Control: Select thedesired cabin air temperaturebetween 16-32°C (60-90°F).Choosing the coldest or warmesttemperature setting does not causethe system to heat or cool anyfaster.

AUTO (Automatic Air DeliveryMode): Turn the air delivery modeknob to AUTO for the system toautomatically control the direction ofthe airflow to help reach the desiredinside temperature.

The system automatically controlsthe air inlet to supply the outside airor recirculated inside air needed to



heat or cool the vehicle faster. The@ button indicator light is litwhenever the recirculation modeis on.

Press the8 button to change tooutside air. However, therecirculation mode may turn back onautomatically.

In cold weather, if the fan and airdelivery modes are in automatic, thesystem starts at lower fan speeds toavoid directing cold air into thevehicle until warmer air is available.The climate control system directsair to the floor, but mayautomatically change modes as thevehicle warms up to maintain thechosen temperature setting. Thelength of time needed to warm theinterior depends on the outsidetemperature and inside temperatureof the vehicle.

Manual Operation

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. To turn the

fan off, turn the left knob to the9position. In any setting other thanoff, the fan runs continuously withthe ignition on. The fan must beturned on to run the air conditioningcompressor. There will be someairflow noticeable from the variousoutlets when driving, even with thefan in the off position. To turn off theair completely, turn the fan to9and select the@ button.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature. Select the desiredcabin air temperature between16-32°C (60-90°F). Typically, thebest setting is near 23°C (75°F).Choosing the coldest or warmesttemperature setting does not causethe system to heat or cool anyfaster.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

Select from the following air deliverymodes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the windshield.

When this mode is selected, thesystem turns the recirculation modeoff. Recirculation mode cannot beselected while in floor mode. This isto help prevent window fogging.

- (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the windshield and side windowoutlets. In this mode, the systemturns the recirculation mode off andruns the air conditioning compressorunless the outside air is at or belowfreezing. Recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in defog mode.This helps prevent window fogging.



0 (Defrost): Removes fog or frostfrom the windshield more quickly.Air is directed to the windshield andthe side window outlets. In thismode, the system turns therecirculation mode off automaticallyand runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside air isat or below freezing. Recirculationmode cannot be selected while indefrost mode. This helps preventwindow fogging.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes on toshow that the air conditioning is on.The air conditioning can be selectedin any mode as long as the fan is onand the outside temperature isabove freezing. A flashing indicatorlight indicates that the airconditioning compressor is currentlynot available.

On hot days, use the automatic fanand automatic air delivery modesettings and the vehicle will reachthe desired temperature morequickly. The desired fan and airdelivery mode settings can still beadjusted manually. Open thewindows to let the hot inside airescape, then close them. This helpsreduce the time it takes for thevehicle to cool down and helps thesystem to operate more efficiently.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine.

8 (Outside Air): Press to turnthe outside air mode on. Anindicator light comes on to showthat outside air is on. Air fromoutside the vehicle will circulatethroughout the vehicle. The outsideair mode can be used with allmodes, but it cannot be used withthe recirculation mode. Pressing thisbutton will cancel therecirculation mode.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation mode. Anindicator light comes on to showthat recirculation is on. This moderecirculates and helps to quicklycool or heat the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle. Avoid using therecirculation mode during highperiods of humidity and cool outsidetemperatures since this may resultin increased window fogging.If window fogging is experienced,select the defrost mode.

Recirculation mode is not availablein floor, defog, or defrost modes andwill shut off automatically andchange to outside air. If the button isselected in any of these modes, theindicator will flash. This helpsprevent window fogging andmoisture building up inside thevehicle.



Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is inON/RUN.

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatit is activated.

The rear window defogger stays onfor approximately 10 minutes afterthe button is pressed, unless theignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.If turned on again, the defogger onlyruns for approximately five minutesbefore turning off. At higher vehiclespeeds, the defogger may stay oncontinuously. The defogger can alsobe turned off by turning off theengine.

{ Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject on the inside rear windowcan damage the antenna ordefogger. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not stick anything to the rearwindow.

L or M (Heated Front Seats, IfEquipped): Press to heat the driveror passenger seat cushion andseatback. To turn off, press thebutton until the indicator lights turnoff. See Heated Front Seats onpage 3-6.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

If equipped with the remote startfeature, when it is activated, theclimate control system heats andcools the inside of the vehicle usingthe modes that were set before thevehicle was turned off.

Air VentsMove the louvers on the air outletsup or down to change the directionof the airflow. The louvers donot turn.

Use the thumbwheels near eachvent to open and close off theairflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the vehicle that mayblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Do not use any non-GMapproved hood deflectors thatcould adversely affect theperformance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Do not insert objects into the airoutlets. This may affect theoperation of the outlet.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-2 for replacement intervals.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11-13.

The passenger compartment airfilter can be accessed by removingthe entire glove box.

1. Remove the four screws fromaround the glove box and detachthe three inner clips from theglove box.

2. Lower the loosened glove boxhousing.

3. Unplug both wire cables andremove the glove box.



4. Remove the air filter coverscrew.

5. Remove the filter cover and pullout the old air filter.

6. Install the new air filter.

7. Reinstall the air filter cover.Reconnect the wire cabling andreinstall the glove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDriver Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Driving Environment . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Vehicle Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-21Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Driver Assistance SystemsParking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-37Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47


9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Driver BehaviorDriving is an importantresponsibility. Driver behavior, thedriving environment, and thevehicle's design all affect how well avehicle performs.

Being aware of these factors canhelp in understanding how thevehicle handles and what can bedone to avoid many types ofcrashes, including a rollover crash.

Most serious injuries and fatalities tounbelted occupants can be reducedor prevented by the use of safetybelts. In a rollover crash, anunbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a personwearing a safety belt. In addition,avoiding excessive speed, suddenor abrupt turns, and drunken oraggressive driving can help maketrips safer and avoid the possibilityof a crash.

Driving EnvironmentBe prepared for driving in inclementweather, at night, or during othertimes where visibility or traction maybe limited, such as on curves,slippery roads, or hilly terrain.Unfamiliar surroundings can alsohave hidden hazards.

Learn more about driving in differentconditions and off-road driving inthis section.

Vehicle DesignUtility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other typesof vehicles. This is because theyhave a higher ground clearance anda narrower track or shorterwheelbase than passenger cars,which makes them more capable foroff-road driving. While these designcharacteristics provide the driverwith a better view of the road, thesevehicles do have a higher center ofgravity than other types of vehicles.

A utility vehicle does not handle thesame as a vehicle with a lowercenter of gravity, like a car, in similarsituations.

Safe driver behavior andunderstanding of the environmentcan help avoid a rollover crash inany type of vehicle, including utilityvehicles.

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.



To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3-9.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.



{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be some

power brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Hydraulic Power Steering

This vehicle has hydraulic powersteering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid on page 10-20.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops orbecause of a system malfunction,the vehicle can be steered but mayrequire increased effort. See yourdealer if there is a problem.

{ Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionfor more than 15 seconds,

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

damage may occur to the powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve.. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering

Skid — too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.



Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.



There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10-37.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

loss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.



Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Traction Control should be turnedon. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-28.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9-25.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of a

curve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems”.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-20.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-28.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. The

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not get



the vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-70.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driverdoor open, you will find the labelattached near the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seating



positions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflation,see Tires on page 10-37 andTire Pressure on page 10-44.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manualto determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing on page 9-44for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.



Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and



seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certificationlabel is attached to the lowerarea of the center pillar (B-Pillar)on the driver side of the vehicle.The label tells the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes

the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If the vehicle is carrying a heavyload, it should be spread out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This could

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

cause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

{ Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9-44 for the trailertowing capabilities of thevehicle and more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.



Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and apply the regularbrake pedal.

{ Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.

LOCK (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-17.

This position locks the ignition.It also locks the steering wheel andthe transmission. The key can onlybe removed in LOCK/OFF. The shiftlever must be in P (Park) to turn theignition switch to LOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoes not work, the vehicle needsservice.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.



3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-26

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This isthe position in which you canoperate some electrical accessoriesor items plugged into the accessorypower outlets.

Use this position if the vehicle mustbe pushed or towed.

ON (ON/RUN): This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition. If you leave the key in theACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNpositions with the engine off, thebattery could be drained. You maynot be able to start the vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

START: This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the ignition.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

{ Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9-47.



{ Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

{ Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionwhile starting the vehicle, damagemay occur to the hydraulic powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will slowdown as the engine warms. Donot race the engine immediately

after starting it. Allow the oil towarm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

{ Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cool

down. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat thesesteps. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes after theignition key is turned to the LOCKposition:. Outside Mirror. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped). Radio

The outside mirror, power windowsand sunroof will function until a dooris opened.



The radio will function until thedriver door is opened.

Shifting Into ParkTo shift into P (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-26 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing the leverall the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-18. If you are towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-40.

If you have to leave an automatictransmission vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure the vehicle is inP (Park) and the parking brake isfirmly set before you leave it. Afteryou have moved the shift lever into

P (Park), hold the brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) withoutfirst pushing the button. If you can, itmeans that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift into P (Park) properly,the weight of the vehicle may puttoo much force on the parking pawlin the transmission. You may find itdifficult to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park). This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift intoP (Park) properly before you leavethe driver seat. To find out how, seeShifting Into Park on page 9-18.

Move the shift lever out of P (Park)before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some of



the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pullthe shift lever out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThe vehicle has an electronic shiftlock release system. The shift lockrelease is designed to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10-66 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.



Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9-18and Engine Exhaust on page 9-20.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-40.



AutomaticTransmission

There are several different positionsfor the automatic transmission.

P (Park): This position locks thewheels. It is the best position to usewhen starting the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-18 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 9-40.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to fully apply theregular brakes first and then press

the shift lever button before you canshift from P (Park) when the ignitionkey is in ON/RUN. If you cannotshift out of P (Park), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shiftlever all the way into P (Park) asyou maintain brake application.Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever intoanother gear. See Shifting out ofPark on page 9-19.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

{ Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.



To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-9.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

{ Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving with the automatictransmission. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph),push the accelerator all theway down.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9-5.

M (Manual): This position allowsyou to change gears similar to amanual transmission. If equipped,see Manual Mode on page 9-22.

{ Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.

Manual Mode

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronic shiftposition indicator within the



instrument panel cluster. Whenusing the ERS mode a number willdisplay in place of the D (Drive),indicating the current gear rangethat has been selected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonlocated on the shift lever, toincrease or decrease the gearrange available.

When you shift from D (Drive) toM (Manual), the transmission willshift to a pre-determined lower gearrange. The highest gear availablefor this pre-determined range isdisplayed in the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-23. The number displayed inthe DIC is the highest gear that thetransmission will be allowed tooperate in. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown, 1 (First) through4 (Fourth) gears are automaticallyshifted by the vehicle. Thetransmission will not shift into5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button isused or you shift back into D (Drive).

While in M (Manual), thetransmission will prevent shifting toa lower gear range if the enginespeed is too high. You have a briefperiod of time to slow the vehicle.If vehicle speed is not reducedwithin the time allowed, the lowergear range shift will not becompleted. You must further slow

the vehicle, then press the − (Minus)button to the desired lower gearrange.

Automatic Engine Grade Braking isnot available when the ERS isactive. It is available in D (Drive).While using the ERS, cruise controlcan be used.

Fuel Economy ModeThe vehicle may have a fueleconomy mode. When engaged,fuel economy mode can improve thevehicle's fuel economy.



Pressing the eco button by the shiftlever will engage fuel economymode. When activated, the eco lightin the instrument cluster will comeon. See Fuel Economy Light onpage 5-21. Pressing the button asecond time will turn fuel economymode off.

When fuel economy mode is on:. The transmission will upshift

sooner, and downshift later.. The torque converter will

lock–up sooner, and stay onlonger.

. The gas pedal will be lesssensitive.

. The vehicle’s drivingperformance will be moreconservative.

. The vehicle's computers willmore aggressively shut off fuelto the engine under deceleration.

. The engine idle speed will belower.

Do not use fuel economy modewhile towing.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature alwayssend engine power to all fourwheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact spare tire onan AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and disables AWD. To restoreAWD operation and preventexcessive wear on the system,replace the compact spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10-65.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5-18.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch for theEPB is in the center console. TheEPB can always be activated, evenif the ignition is OFF. To preventdraining the battery, avoid repeatedcycles of the EPB system when theengine is not running.

The system has a parking brakestatus light and a parking brakewarning light. See Electric ParkingBrake Light on page 5-17. There arealso several Driver Information

Center (DIC) messages. See BrakeSystem Messages on page 5-28. Incase of insufficient electrical power,the EPB cannot be applied orreleased.

Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe parking brake status light toinsure the parking brake is applied.

EPB Apply

The EPB can be applied any timethe vehicle is stopped. The EPB isapplied by momentarily lifting up onthe EPB switch. Once fully applied,the parking brake status light andbrake system warning light will beon. While the brake is being applied,the status light will flash until fullapply is reached. Once fully applied,the DIC message PARK BRAKESET will be displayed. If the statuslight does not come on, or remainsflashing, have the vehicle serviced.Do not drive the vehicle if theparking brake status light is flashing.See your dealer. See ElectricParking Brake Light on page 5-17.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is in motion, a chime willsound, and the DIC messageRELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCHwill be displayed. The vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switch isheld in the up position. Releasingthe EPB switch during decelerationwill release the parking brake. If theswitch is held in the up position untilthe vehicle comes to a stop, theEPB will remain applied.

If the parking brake status lightflashes continuously, the EPB isonly partially applied or released,or there is a problem with the EPB.The DIC message SERVICEPARKING BRAKE will be displayed.If this light flashes continuously,release the EPB, and attempt toapply it again. If this light continuesto flash, do not drive the vehicle.See your dealer.

If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an errorin another system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. To applythe EPB when this light is on, lift up



on the EPB switch and hold it in theup position. Full application of theparking brake by the EPB systemmay take a longer period of timethan normal when this light is on.Continue to hold the switch until theparking brake status light remainson. If the parking brake warning lightis on, see your dealer.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB, place theignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN position, apply and holdthe brake pedal, and push downmomentarily on the EPB switch.If you attempt to release the EPBwithout the brake pedal applied, achime will sound, and the DICmessage STEP ON BRAKE TORELEASE PARK BRAKE will bedisplayed. The EPB is releasedwhen the parking brake status lightis off.

If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an errorin another system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. Torelease the EPB when this light ison, push down on the EPB switchand hold it in the down position.EPB release may take a longerperiod of time than normal when thislight is on. Continue to hold theswitch until the parking brake statuslight is off. If the light is on, see yourdealer.

{ Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve parking brake lining life.

For maximum EPB force whentowing a trailer or parking on a hill,pull the EPB switch twice. If you aretowing a trailer and parking on a hill,see Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips on page 9-40.



Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel slipand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of the

vehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9-9 and “Turning the SystemsOff and On” later in this section.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:. Flash when TCS is limiting

wheel spin.. Flash when StabiliTrak is

activated.. Turn on and stay on when either

system is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.



If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrakis on the instrument panel.

{ Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease the g button. Theappropriate message displays in theDIC. To turn TCS on again, pressand release the g button. Theappropriate message displays inthe DIC.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe g button is pressed, the systemwill not turn off until the wheels stopspinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the g button until

the StabiliTrak Off light g comes onand stays on in the instrumentcluster. To turn TCS and StabiliTrakon again, press and release the g

button. The StabiliTrak Off light g inthe instrument cluster turns off. Theappropriate message displays inthe DIC.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.

Brake Pedal Override

This vehicle has this feature thatlimits engine torque when the brakepedal is applied. If there is one footon the brake pedal and the otherfoot on the accelerator, the enginerpm will only climb to slightly morethan idle speed.

This feature is enabled at vehiclestart. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button g to disable orenable this feature and TCS. Theappropriate message will display onthe DIC. See Ride Control SystemMessages on page 5-32.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not use thecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If equipped with the StabiliTrak®

feature, the system may begin tolimit wheel spin while you are usingcruise control. If this happens, the

cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-28. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again,cruise control can be turnedback on.

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol shuts off.

E (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control on or off. Theindicator light on the button turns onor off.

RES+ (Resume/Accel): If there isa set speed in memory, move thethumbwheel up briefly to resumethat speed or hold upward toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

−SET (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease speed.

Setting Cruise Control

If theE button is on when not inuse, −SET or RES+ could getbumped and go into cruise when notdesired. Keep the E button offwhen cruise is not being used.

1. PressE to turn the cruisesystem on. The indicator light onthe button comes on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel down andrelease it.



4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

A green cruise control indicatorappears on the instrument clusterafter cruise control has been set tothe desired speed. See InstrumentCluster on page 5-9.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory. The indicatorlight on the instrument cluster goesout when cruise control is no longerengaged.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move thethumbwheel up toward RES+ briefly.The vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES+ and hold it until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, and thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, move thethumbwheel up toward RES+briefly and then release it. Eachtime this is done, the vehiclegoes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster onpage 5-9. The increment value useddepends on the units displayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel toward

−SET and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in smallincrements, move thethumbwheel toward −SET briefly.Each time this is done, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster onpage 5-9. The increment value useddepends on the units displayed.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise control speed.



While pressing the accelerator pedalor shortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflymoving the thumbwheel toward–SET will result in cruise set to thecurrent vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehicle'sspeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle's speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep yourspeed down. For some vehicles thetransmission may automaticallydownshift when going down hills tohelp maintain the vehicle's speed.If the brake pedal is applied, cruisecontrol will disengage.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to disengagethe cruise control:. Step lightly on the brake pedal;

when cruise control disengages,the indicator light on theinstrument cluster goes out.

. PressE to turn off the cruisecontrol system.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if the E buttonis pressed or the ignition isturned off.

Driver AssistanceSystems

Parking AssistIf available, the Rear Parking Assist(RPA) system assists the driver withparking and avoiding objects whilein R (Reverse). RPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).The sensors on the rear bumper areused to detect objects up to2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, andat least 25 cm (10 in) off the groundand below liftgate level. Detectiondistances may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.

{ Warning

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with parking assist,always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrorsbefore backing.

How the System Works

RPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single beep soundsto indicate the system is working.

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeping iscontinuous for five seconds.

Turning the System On and Off

The system can be disabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Park Assist” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-23.

Turn off RPA when towing a trailer.

RPA defaults to the on setting eachtime the vehicle is started.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL: Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:. The sensors are not clean. Keep

the vehicle's rear bumper free ofmud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush.For cleaning instructions, seeExterior Care on page 10-74.

. The sensors are covered byfrost or ice. Frost or ice can formaround and behind the sensorsand may not always be seen;this can occur after washing thevehicle in cold weather. Themessage may not clear until thefrost or ice has melted.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or an object washanging out of the liftgate duringthe last drive cycle. Once theobject is removed, RPA willreturn to normal operation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.



Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have an RVCsystem. Read this entire sectionbefore using it.

The RVC can assist the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

{ Warning

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object located outside thecamera's field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Perceived distances may bedifferent from actual distances.Do not back the vehicle usingonly the RVC screen. Failure touse proper care before backingmay result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Always checkbehind and around the vehiclebefore backing.

An image appears on theinfotainment screen with themessage Check Surroundings forSafety when the vehicle is shiftedinto R (Reverse). The infotainmentscreen goes to the previous screenafter approximately 10 secondsonce the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse).

To see the previous screen sooner,do one of the following:. Press a hard key on the

infotainment system.. Shift into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is above the licenseplate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited.

It does not display objects that areclose to either corner or under thebumper and can vary depending onvehicle orientation or roadconditions. Displayed images maybe farther or closer than theyappear.



The following illustrations show thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

1. View displayed by thecamera.

1. View displayed by thecamera.

2. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. It is dark.. The sun or the beam of

headamps is shining directly intothe camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

. There are extreme temperaturechanges.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S. and Canada, tohelp keep the engine clean andmaintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend usingTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.See www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.

If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap,E85 or FlexFuel can be used in thevehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel onpage 9-37.

Use regular unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. Do not use gasoline with anoctane rating below 87, as it maycause engine damage and will lowerfuel economy.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. The fuelsindustry automatically modifies thefuel for the appropriate season.If fuel is left in the vehicle tank forlong periods of time, driving orstarting could be affected. Drive thevehicle until the fuel is at one-halftank or less, then refuel with thecurrent seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenatessuch as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines, are

available in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inFlexFuel vehicles.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines, mainly high octaneracing gasolines, can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines and/or fuel additives withMMT as they can reduce spark pluglife and affect emission controlsystem performance. The



malfunction indicator lamp may turnon. If this occurs, see your dealerfor service.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-14. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, manganese, or any otherfuel not recommended. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improperfuel would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel onpage 9-36.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange can help. Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the only

gasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Do not use additives with E85 orFlexFuel.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline or fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).All other vehicles should use onlythe unleaded gasoline as describedin Fuel on page 9-36.

The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

To help locate fuel stations thatcarry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.Department of Energy has analternative fuel website. Seewww.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations.

E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798 or CAN/CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not use



the fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%. Fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

The starting characteristics of E85or FlexFuel make it unsuitable foruse when temperatures fall below−18°C (0°F). Use gasoline or addgasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel.

Because E85 or FlexFuel has lessenergy per liter (gallon) thangasoline, the vehicle will need to berefilled more often. See Filling theTank on page 9-38.

{ Caution

Some additives are notcompatible with E85 or FlexFueland can harm the vehicle's fuelsystem. Do not add anything toE85 or FlexFuel. Damage causedby additives would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way.



The fuel cap is located behind ahinged fuel door on the driver sideof the vehicle. If equipped, the fueldoor is locked when the vehicledoors are locked. Press K on theRKE transmitter to unlock.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right. To avoid fuel contact onthe painted surface of the vehiclewhen filling the fuel tank, place thecap on the fuel filler door.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10-74.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-14.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

{ Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap might not fit properly,might cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-14.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

keep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-70.For towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle such as a motorhome, see Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10-70.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:. Become familiar with the state

and local laws that applyspecifically to trailer towing.



. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500mi), to preventdamage to the engine, axle orother parts.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 mi) trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive)but M (Manual Mode) isrecommended. See ManualMode on page 9-22. Use a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often.

. Turn off Park Assist whentowing.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

When towing a trailer:. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.


. Also adjust the ClimateControl system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-20.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.



This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move your hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

{ Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument cluster flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer

lamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument cluster flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphill



grades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10-18.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine.. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See theMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10-18.



Trailer TowingThree important considerationshave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weight ofthe Trailer Tongue” later in thissection for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.



Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt. *GCWR

2WD – 2.4L L4 Engine 3.23 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 650 kg (5,840 lbs)

AWD – 3.0L V6 Engine 3.23 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 629 kg (8,000 lbs)

2WD – 3.0L V6 Engine 3.23 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 549 kg (7,820 lbs)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.

If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.



If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (1) shouldweigh 10-15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (2).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Inflate the vehicle's tires to theupper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on theCertification label or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-10 for moreinformation. Do not go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, or theGAWR, including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, do not go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by, and rough roadsare a few reasons why the righthitch is needed.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, then be sure to seal theholes when the hitch is removed.If the holes are not sealed, dirt,water, and deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from the exhaustmay get into the vehicle. SeeEngine Exhaust on page 9-20.



Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not try to tap into thevehicle's hydraulic brake system.If you do, both brake systems willnot work well, or at all.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-28 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-28.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-20Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-29Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-39Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50


10-2 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-65

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-70Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine parts and trained andsupported service people.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, is

not covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-28.


Vehicle Care 10-3

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck on page 3-29.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed.

{ Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbol.It is located below the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle andlift up on the secondary hoodrelease lever.

3. Lift the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be surethat all the filler caps areproperly installed.

2. Lower the hood 20 cm (8 in)above the vehicle and release itso it fully latches.

3. Check to make sure the hood isfirmly closed. Repeat theprocess if necessary.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.4L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-5

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-12.

2. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10-20.

3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-13.

4. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10-8.

5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10-8.

6. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10-20.

7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrakes on page 10-21.

8. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-66.

9. Battery on page 10-23.

10. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap. See“Checking Coolant” underEngine Coolant on page 10-14.

11. Remote Negative (-) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-66.

12. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-31.


10-6 Vehicle Care

3.0L V6 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-12.

2. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out ofView). See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10-8.

3. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir(Out of View). See PowerSteering Fluid on page 10-20.

4. Engine Cover. See EngineCover on page 10-7.

5. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10-8.

6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-13.

7. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10-20.

8. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrakes on page 10-21.

9. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-66.

10. Battery on page 10-23.

11. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.See “Checking Coolant” underEngine Coolant on page 10-14.

12. Remote Negative (-) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-66.

13. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-31.

Engine Cover

Engine Cover (3.0L V6)

1. Oil Fill Cap2. Engine Cover Bolt3. Engine Cover

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).

2. Remove the engine coverbolt (2).

3. Raise the engine cover (3) torelease it from the retainers.


10-8 Vehicle Care

4. Lift and remove the enginecover.

5. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstallthe engine cover.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-10.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-4 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN(minimum) mark, add 1 L (1 qt) ofthe recommended oil and thenrecheck the level. See “Selectingthe Right Engine Oil” in this sectionfor an explanation of what kind of oil


Vehicle Care 10-9

to use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

{ Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the upper mark thatshows the proper operatingrange, the engine could bedamaged. You should drain outthe excess oil or limit driving ofthe vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-4 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark.This certification mark indicates thatthe oil has been approved to thedexos1 specification. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

{ Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity gradeengine oil.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely low


10-10 Vehicle Care

temperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash or

properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. For

the oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message displays. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5-30.If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage displays, change the oil assoon as possible within the next1 000 km (600mi). If the CHANGEENGINE OIL NOW messagedisplays, change the oil as soon aspossible. It is possible that, if drivingunder the best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularly


Vehicle Care 10-11

over the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-23 and Engine OilMessages on page 5-30.

2. Press V for five seconds toreset the oil life at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the OIL LIFE REMAINING value isnot 100%, the system needs to bereset again.

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leak

occurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

Change the fluid at the intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-2, and be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

{ Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use theautomatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

For the 2.4L L4 and 3.0LV6 engines, the transmission fluidwill not reach the end of the dipstickunless the transmission is atoperating temperature. If you need


10-12 Vehicle Care

to check the transmission fluid level,please take the vehicle to yourdealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-4 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect and replace the air cleaner/filter at the scheduled maintenanceintervals. See the MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2. If driving industy/dirty conditions, inspect thefilter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.

To inspect or replace:

2.4L L4 Engine Shown, 3.0LV6 Engine Similar

1. Electrical Connector2. Air Duct Clamp3. Screws

1. Disconnect the electricalconnector (1).

2. Loosen the air duct clamp (2) onthe air duct hose. Disconnect theair duct hose.

3. Remove the screws (3) on thesides of the air cleaner coverassembly.

4. Turn the cover upward todisengage the cover hinges.

5. Lift and remove the air cleanercover assembly and air filterelement.

6. Inspect or replace the air filterelement.

If the air filter element is dirty,you should replace it.

Wipe all dust from inside of thehousing and inspect the aircleaner and air outlet duct forcracks, cuts, and deterioration.The air outlet duct must bereplaced if damaged.

7. Reverse Steps 1–5 to reinstallthe engine air cleaner/filter coverand air duct hose.


Vehicle Care 10-13

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

{ Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling System

2.4L L4 Engine

1. Engine Fan (Out of View)2. Coolant Surge Tank and

Pressure Cap

3.0L V6 Engine

1. Engine Fans (Out of View)2. Coolant Surge Tank and

Pressure Cap

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.


10-14 Vehicle Care

If the coolant inside the coolantsurge tank is hot, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should bebetween the MIN and MAX lines.If it is not, you may have a leak atthe radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhereelse in the cooling system.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, withthe engine on, check to see if theengine cooling fan(s) is running.

If the engine is overheating, the fanshould be running. If it is not, thevehicle needs service. Turn off theengine.

{ Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first, if only DEX-COOLextended life coolant is added.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to add coolantwhen it is low. If there is a problemwith engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 10-18.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant will:. Give freezing protection down to

−37°C (−34°F).. Give boiling protection up to

129°C (265°F).. Protect against rust and

corrosion.. Help keep the proper engine

temperature.. Let the warning lights and

gauges work as they should.


Vehicle Care 10-15

{ Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

What to Use

Use a mixture of one-half clean,drinkable water and one-halfDEX-COOL coolant which will notdamage aluminum parts. If you usethis coolant mixture, you do notneed to add anything else.

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

{ Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and be

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

damaged. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

If coolant has to be added morethan four times a year, have thedealer check the vehicle coolingsystem.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is located onthe driver side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-4 for more information onlocation.

{ Warning

Turning the surge tank pressurecap when the engine and radiatorare hot can allow steam andscalding liquids to blow out andburn you badly. Never turn thesurge tank pressure cap— even alittle—when the engine andradiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface. When the engine is cold,the coolant level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX lines.

Adding Coolant

If more coolant is needed, add theproper DEX-COOL coolant mixtureat the coolant surge tank, but onlywhen the engine is cool. See belowfor instructions on “How to AddCoolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap,make sure it is hand-tight and fullyseated.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

If a problem yet has not been found,check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not atbetween the MIN and MAX lines,add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant at the coolant surge tank,but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tankpressure cap, is cool before doing it.See Engine Overheating onpage 10-18 for more information.


Vehicle Care 10-17

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

{ Caution

In cold weather, water can freezeand crack the engine, radiator,heater core, and other parts. Usethe recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If a hiss isheard, wait for that to stop. This


10-18 Vehicle Care

will allow any pressure still left tobe vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture, to between the MIN andMAX lines.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches between the MINand MAX lines.

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

{ Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Check the level in the surge tankwhen the cooling system has cooleddown. If the coolant is not at the

proper level, repeat Steps 1–3 andreinstall the pressure cap. If thecoolant still is not at the proper levelwhen the system cools down again,see the dealer.

Engine OverheatingThere is a coolant temperaturewarning light on the instrumentpanel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light onpage 5-20.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan cause serious injury, even ifthe hood is opened just a little.Stay away from the engine ifsteam is seen or heard comingfrom it. Just turn it off and geteveryone away from the vehicle

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-19

Warning (Continued)

until it cools down. Wait until thereis no sign of steam or coolantbefore opening the hood.

If driving continues when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. Someonecould get badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engine hascooled.

{ Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If there is an overheat warning withno sign of steam, try this for aminute or so:

1. If equipped with air conditioning,turn it off.

2. Turn on the heater to full hot atthe highest fan speed and openthe windows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the overheat warning is no longeron, the vehicle can be driven. Justto be safe, drive slowly for about10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, drive normally andhave the cooling system checkedfor proper fill and function..

If the warning continues and thevehicle is not stopped, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning continues,turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down.

The decision may be made to not liftthe hood but to get service helpright away.


10-20 Vehicle Care

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-4 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unless aleak in the system is suspected oran unusual noise is heard. A fluidloss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the ignition off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Remove the engine cover,if required. See Engine Cover onpage 10-7.

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

4. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be within thearea indicated on the dipstick whenthe engine is cold. If necessary, addonly enough fluid to bring the levelwithin the area indicated.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, refer to Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-12.Always use the proper fluid.

{ Caution

Use of the incorrect fluid maydamage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature can fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.


Vehicle Care 10-21

Adding Windshield WasherFluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-4.

{ Caution

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

to freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time when the vehicleis moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in the


10-22 Vehicle Care

proper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to get

new, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-4 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.


Vehicle Care 10-23

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-16.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ Warning

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

{ Caution

. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system partsso badly that they will have tobe replaced. Do not letsomeone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-4 for battery location.

{ Warning

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10-66 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck the transfer case fluid unlessa leak is suspected or an unusual

noise is heard. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).

If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle beginsto move.


Vehicle Care 10-25

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-13.

{ Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage that

(Continued)


10-26 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

occurs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not allow thewiper arm to touch the windshield.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Lower the wiper arm.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. Lift the rear wiper arm (1) fromthe window.

2. Turn the bottom edge of theblade assembly (2) slightly awayfrom the underside of thewiper arm.

3. Apply downward pressure to theblade assembly and removefrom the wiper arm.

4. Install the new wiper blade.

5. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe window.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10-30.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

HeadlampsTo replace one of the headlampbulbs, use the following procedure.To replace the parking/turn signallamp bulb, see Front Turn Signaland Parking Lamps on page 10-28.

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10-3.

2. Remove the filler panelfasteners (1) and remove thefiller panel.

3. Remove the three screws (2)retaining the headlampassembly.

4. Pull the headlamp assemblystraight forward releasing theretaining studs from thegrommets.


10-28 Vehicle Care

5. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the bulbassembly.

6. Turn the bulb assemblycounterclockwise to remove itfrom the housing.

7. Replace the old bulb with anew one.

8. Reverse Steps 1–6 to reinstall.

Fog LampsTo replace the front fog lamp bulb:

1. Locate the fog lamp locatedunder the front fascia.

2. Remove the bulb by turning itcounterclockwise and pulling itstraight out of the assembly.

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the fog lamp bulbassembly.

4. Install the new bulb by turning itclockwise into the assembly.

5. Reconnect the electricalconnector.

Front Turn Signal andParking LampsTo replace a front turn signal orparking lamp bulb:

1. Follow Steps 1–4 underHeadlamps on page 10-27 toaccess the front turn signal orparking lamp.

2. Turn the bulb to be replacedcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assembly.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulbsocket assembly.

4. Push the new bulb into the bulbsocket assembly.

5. Insert the bulb assembly into theheadlamp assembly.

6. Turn the bulb assemblyclockwise until seated.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall theheadlamp assembly.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLampsTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Back-Up Lamp

2. Turn Signal Lamp

3. Stoplamp/Taillamp

4. Taillamp

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2-8.

2. Remove the two screws holdingin the taillamp assembly.

3. Slide the taillamp assemblyrearward and away from thevehicle.

4. Turn the bulb socket beingreplaced counterclockwise todisconnect it.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulbsocket.

6. Push the new bulb into the bulbsocket.

7. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstallthe taillamp assembly.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holdingeach of the license plate lampsto the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp forward through the fasciaopening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.


10-30 Vehicle Care

4. Push the new bulb into the bulbsocket and turn it clockwise tolock it into place.

5. Push and turn the license platelamp back through the fasciaopening.

6. Reinstall the two screws holdingthe license plate lamp to thefascia.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

Back-Up Lamp 921

Front Fog Lamp H11

Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp

3157K

Headlamps

High-Beam 9005or HB3

Low-Beam/DRL 9006or HB4

License Plate Lamp 168LL

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

Rear Stoplamp, andTaillamp

7443

Rear TurnSignal Lamp

3757 NAK

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.


Vehicle Care 10-31

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of circuit overload and firecaused by electrical problems.

There are two fuse blocks — theengine compartment fuse block, andthe instrument panel fuse block.

To identify and check fuses andrelays, refer to the Fuse UsageChart on the inside surface of thefuse panel door or cover.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis on the right side of the enginecompartment, near the battery.

{ Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.


10-32 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

ABS Antilock BrakeSystem

Fuses Usage

A/C Heater, Ventilation,and Air ConditioningSystem

BATT1 Instrument PanelFuse Block MainFeed 1

Fuses Usage



BCM Body ControlModule

ECM Engine ControlModule

ECMPWR TRN

Engine ControlModule/Powertrain

ENG SNSR MiscellaneousEngine Sensors

EPB Electric ParkingBrake

FAN1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN3 Cooling Fan 3

FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps

FRT WPR Front Wiper Motor


Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses Usage

FUEL/VAC Fuel Pump/Vacuum Pump

HDLPWASHER

Headlamp Washer

HIBEAM LH

High-BeamHeadlamp (Left)

HIBEAM RH

High-BeamHeadlamp (Right)

HORN Horn

HTDWASH/MIR

Heated WasherFluid/Heated Mirrors

IGN COIL A Ignition Coil A

IGN COIL B Ignition Coil B

LOBEAM LH

Low-BeamHeadlamp (Left)

LOBEAM RH

Low-BeamHeadlamp (Right)

PRK LP LH Parking Lamps (Left)

PRK LP RH Parking Lamps(Right)

Fuses Usage

PRKLP RH*

Parking Lamps(Right) (Europe ParkLamps)

PWM FAN Pulse WidthModulation Fan

REARDEFOG

Rear WindowDefogger

REAR WPR Rear Wiper Motor

SPARE Not Used

STOPLAMP

Stoplamps

STRTR Starter

TCM TransmissionControl Module

TRLRPRK LP

Trailer ParkingLamps

Relays Usage

FAN1 RLY Cooling Fan 1



Relays Usage

FRTFOG RLY

Front Fog Lamps

FUEL/VACPUMP RLY

Fuel Pump/VacuumPump Relay

HDLPWSHR RLY

Headlamp Washer

HIBEAM RLY

High-BeamHeadlamps

LOBEAM RLY

Low-BeamHeadlamps

PWR/TRN RLY

Powertrain

REARDEFOGRLY

Rear WindowDefogger

STOPLAMP RLY

Stoplamps

STRTR RLY Starter

WPRCNTRL RLY

Wiper Control

WPRSPD RLY

Wiper Speed


10-34 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse block ison the passenger side of the lowerconsole.

Pull the latch of the fuse box coverstraight back to access the fuses.


Vehicle Care 10-35

The vehicle may not have all of thefuses, relays, and features shown.

Fuses Usage

AMP Amplifier

APO JACK(CONSOLE)

Auxiliary PowerOutlet Jack

APO JACK(REARCARGO)

Auxiliary PowerOutlet Jack RearCargo

AWD/VENT All-Wheel Drive/Ventilation

BCM (CTSY) Body ControlModule (Courtesy)

BCM(DIMMER)

Body ControlModule (Dimmer)

BCM (INTLIGHT)

Body ControlModule (InteriorLight)

BCM(PRK/TN)

Body ControlModule (Parking/Turn Signal)

BCM (STOP) Body ControlModule (Stoplamp)

Fuses Usage

BCM(TRN SIG)

Body ControlModule (TurnSignal)

BCM(VBATT)

Body ControlModule (BatteryVoltage)

CIGAR Cigarette Lighter

CIM CommunicationsIntegration Module

CLSTR Instrument Cluster

DRL Daytime RunningLamps

DR/LCK Driver Door Lock

DRVRPWR SEAT

Driver Power Seat

DRV/PWR WNDW

Driver PowerWindow

F/DOORLOCK

Fuel Door Lock

FRT WSR Front Washer

Fuses Usage

FSCM Fuel SystemControl Module

FSCMVENT SOL

Fuel SystemControl ModuleVent Solenoid

HEATINGMAT SW

Heating Mat Switch

HTDSEAT PWR

Heated SeatPower

HVAC BLWR Heating,Ventilation, and AirConditioningBlower

IPC Instrument PanelCluster

ISRVM/RCM Inside RearviewMirror/RemoteCompass Module

KEYCAPTURE

Key Capture

L/GATE Liftgate


10-36 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

LOGISTICMODE

Logistic Mode

OSRVM Outside RearviewMirror

PASSPWR WNDW

Passenger PowerWindow

PWR DIODE Power Diode

PWR/MODING

Power Moding

RADIO Radio

RR FOG Rear Defogger

RUN 2 Power Battery KeyOn Run

RUN/CRNK Run Crank

SDM (BATT) Safety DiagnosisModule (Battery)

SDM (IGN 1) Safety DiagnosisModule (Ignition 1)

SPARE Spare

S/ROOF Sunroof

Fuses Usage

S/ROOFBATT

Sunroof Battery

SSPS Speed SensitivePower Steering

STR/WHL SW

Steering WheelSwitch

TRLR Trailer

TRLR BATT Trailer Battery

XBCM Export BodyControl Module

XM/HVAC/DLC

SiriusXM SatelliteRadio (IfEquipped)/Heating,Ventilation, and AirConditioning/DataLink Connection

Relays Usage

ACC/RAP RLY

Accessory/RunAccessory Power

Relays Usage

CIGARAPO

JACK RLY

Cigarette andAuxiliary PowerOutlet

RUN/CRNK RLY

Run/Crank

RUN RLY Run


Vehicle Care 10-37

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.


10-38 Vehicle Care

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation onpage 10-45 for inflation pressureadjustment for high-speeddriving.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level of

traction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10-38.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10-52.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will have decreasedperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving at temperaturesbelow approximately 5°C (40°F) oron ice or snow covered roads isexpected. See Winter Tires onpage 10-38.


Vehicle Care 10-39

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first two

digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on three


10-40 Vehicle Care

performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10-54.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire on page 10-65 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 10-57.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10-44.

(6) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance


Vehicle Care 10-41

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are


10-42 Vehicle Care

automatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10-44.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that faces

outward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10-44 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the tread


10-44 Vehicle Care

of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10-51.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10-54.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-10.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

{ Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.


Vehicle Care 10-45

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare tirepressure should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). See Compact SpareTire on page 10-65.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make sure

(Continued)


10-46 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

the tires are rated for high-speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Vehicles with P235/55R18 size tiresrequire inflation pressure adjustmentwhen driving the vehicle at speedsof 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.Set the cold inflation pressure to themaximum inflation pressure shownon the tire sidewall,or 262 kPa (38 psi), whichever islower. See the example following.Return the tires to therecommended cold tire inflationpressure when high-speed drivinghas ended. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10 and Tire Pressure onpage 10-44.

Example:

The maximum load and inflationpressure is molded on the tiresidewall, in small letters, near therim flange. It will read something likethis: Maximum load 690 kg(1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max.Press.

For this example, set the inflationpressure for high‐speed driving at262 kPa (38 psi).

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.


Vehicle Care 10-47

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-47.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure in

the tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lighton the instrument cluster. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

The low tire pressure warning lightcomes on at each ignition cycle untilthe tires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and then


10-48 Vehicle Care

turn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10-44.

The TPMS system can warn abouta low tire pressure condition but itdoes not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10-50, Tire Rotation onpage 10-50 and Tires onpage 10-37.

{ Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. The malfunctionlight comes on at each ignition cycleuntil the problem is corrected. Someof the conditions that can cause themalfunction light to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight should go off after the roadtire is replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the vehicle's tires. The


Vehicle Care 10-49

malfunction light should go offonce the TPMS sensor matchingprocess is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10-52.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light should go off at thenext ignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure MonitorSensor Activation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS matching process is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Press and hold the RKEtransmitter's Q and K buttons atthe same time, for aboutthree seconds. The horn willsound twice to indicate thereceiver is ready for the sensormatching process to begin.

4. Start with the driver side fronttire. The driver side turn signallamp comes on.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that the


10-50 Vehicle Care

sensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire. The passenger sidefront turn signal lamp comes on.Repeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire. The passenger siderear turn signal lamp comes on.Repeat the procedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire. The driver side rear turnsignal lamp comes on. Repeatthe procedure in Step 5. Thehorn sounds two times toindicate the sensor identificationcode has been matched to thedriver side rear tire, and theTPMS sensor matching processis no longer active.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheel


Vehicle Care 10-51

alignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10-51and Wheel Replacement onpage 10-56.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire and

Loading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-44and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10-47.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12-2.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.


10-52 Vehicle Care

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10-50 and TireRotation on page 10-50.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare if

equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle for

at least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Spec


Vehicle Care 10-53

number is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-39.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10-50.However, if it is necessary toreplace only one axle set ofworn tires, place the new tireson the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, make


10-54 Vehicle Care

sure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10-46.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover

may be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10-52 and Accessories andModifications on page 10-2.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with


Vehicle Care 10-55

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of


10-56 Vehicle Care

performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other road

surface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

{ Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicle

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-57

Caution (Continued)

ground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10-37. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.


10-58 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only for

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

changing a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-3.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1).


Vehicle Care 10-59

1. Wheel Block2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

To access the spare tire:

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Push the levers on the load floor.

3. Lift the load floor and hang thehook to the tailgate opening.

The lip of the cargo cover willneed to be flipped back for theload floor to reach the tailgateopening.

4. Remove the tire protector foam.


10-60 Vehicle Care

5. Remove the wheel retainer boltholding down the spare tire byturning it counterclockwise.

6. Remove the compact spare tire.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10-65.

The tools are located between thecompact spare tire and the liftgate.To access the tools:

1. Tool Bag2. Wing-bolt3. Jack

1. Remove the wing-bolt (2) fromthe jack.

2. Remove the jack (3) andtool bag (1).

3. Remove the straps holding thebag containing the wheel wrenchand extension jack handle,if equipped.

Remove the wheel wrench andextension jack handle,if equipped, from the bag.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10-57.

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts. Do notremove them yet.


Vehicle Care 10-61

3. Position the lift head at the jacklocation nearest the flat tire.Make sure all of the jack lifthead is touching the jackingflange under the body. Do notplace the jack under a bodypanel. The lower body panel hasan arrow to aid in locating thejacking location.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

{ Caution

Make sure that the jack lift headis in the correct position or youmay damage your vehicle. Therepairs would not be covered byyour warranty.


10-62 Vehicle Care

4. If you have a coin/pierce jack,attach the jack handle extensionto the jack by sliding the hookthrough the end of the jack andinsert the other end of the jackhandle into the wrench.

If you have a hex-head jack,attach the jack lift-assist tool byplacing the hex of the jacklift-assist tool over the hex headof the jack.

Coin/Pierce Jack and Wrench

Hex Head Jack and Wrench

5. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the road tire to be removed.

6. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

7. Remove the flat tire.

8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

9. Place the compact spare tire onthe wheel-mounting surface.

10. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.


Vehicle Care 10-63

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

11. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

{ Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the proper

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

sequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications forthe wheel nut torque specification.

13. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

14. Tighten the bolts firmly with thewheel wrench.

When reinstalling full plastic coversor center caps, tighten all the plasticcaps hand snug, then tighten withthe wheel wrench an additionalone-quarter of a turn.

{ Caution

Wheel covers will not fit on thevehicle's compact spare. If you tryto put a wheel cover on thecompact spare, the cover or thespare could be damaged.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the flat or spare tire andtools:

1. Tool Bag2. Wing-bolt3. Jack

1. Place the wheel wrench andextension, if equipped, into thetool bag (1) and use the strapsto secure the tool bag (1) to thefully collapsed jack (3).

2. Install the jack (3) between theback of the trunk and thecompact spare tire and securewith the wing-bolt (2).

3. Reverse Steps 1–3 under“Removing the Spare Tire andTools” to replace the floor andlock in place.

4. Place the flat, or damaged tire,face down on the bottom of thespare tire compartment.

Before


Vehicle Care 10-65

After

5. Remove the disk from theretainer bolt. Turn the disk overand place it back on theretainer bolt.

Return the disk back to itsoriginal position after removingthe flat tire from the spare tirecompartment and before storingthe spare tire.

6. Place the wheel retainer boltonto the wheel stow rod andtighten by turning it clockwise.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as possible.

Compact Spare Tire

{ Warning

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h


10-66 Vehicle Care

(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

When using a compact spare tire,the ABS and Traction Controlsystems may engage until the sparetire is recognized by the vehicle,especially on slippery roads. Adjustdriving to reduce possiblewheel slip.

{ Caution

When the compact spare isinstalled, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheel,and other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

{ Caution

Tire chains will not fit the compactspare. Using them can damagethe vehicle and the chains. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10-23.

If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


Vehicle Care 10-67

{ Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

{ Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the transmissionin P (Park) before setting theparking brake.

{ Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

warranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparks,helping save both batteries andthe radio.

4. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

Open the hood on your vehicleand find the remote positive (+)and remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminals.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Your vehicle is equipped with aremote positive (+) terminal. Thisis located in the enginecompartment on the driver sideof the vehicle, on the underhoodfuse block. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-4 for more informationon location.

To uncover the remotepositive (+) terminal, press thetab on the bottom of the fuseblock and lift the cover up.

Your vehicle is equipped with aremote negative (−) terminal.This is a stud next to the enginecoolant surge tank, located atthe back of the enginecompartment on the driver sideof the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-4 for more informationon location.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-69

Warning (Continued)

add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldalso be damaged.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts.Do not connect the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalon the dead battery because thiscan cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalon the vehicle with the dead

battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable away from thedead battery, but not near


10-70 Vehicle Care

engine parts that move. Theelectrical connection is just asgood there, and the chance ofsparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Press the unlock symbol on theremote keyless entrytransmitter to disarm yoursecurity system, if equipped.

12. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

{ Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

Towing the Vehicle

{ Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier. A wheel lift tow truckcould damage the vehicle.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on the


Vehicle Care 10-71

ground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

Front-wheel-drive andall-wheel-drive vehicles may bedinghy towed from the front. Thesevehicles can also be towed byplacing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of theground. For other towing options,see “Dolly Towing” following in thissection.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle that will betowed and secure it to thetowing vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn fog lamps and allaccessories off.

5. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove the 2 amp


10-72 Vehicle Care

PWR/MODING fuse from theinstrument panel fuse block andstore it in a safe location. SeeInstrument Panel Fuse Block onpage 10-34.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is towed withoutperforming each of the stepslisted under “Dinghy Towing,” theautomatic transmission could bedamaged. Be sure to follow allsteps of the dinghy towingprocedure prior to and aftertowing the vehicle.

{ Caution

If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceededwhile towing the vehicle, it couldbe damaged. Never exceed105 km/h (65 mph) while towingthe vehicle.

Once the destination has beenreached:


2. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

3. Reinstall the 2 amp PWR/MODING fuse to the instrumentpanel fuse block.

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF and remove the key fromthe ignition.

{ Caution

Do not tow a vehicle with the frontdrive wheels on the ground if oneof the front tires is a compactspare tire. Towing with twodifferent tire sizes on the front ofthe vehicle can cause severedamage to the transmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-DriveVehicles)

All-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front. See “Dinghy Towing”earlier in this section.

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)


Vehicle Care 10-73

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).


4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle fromthe Rear { Caution

Towing the vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never have thevehicle towed from the rear.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

{ Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaning

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

products can be obtained fromyour dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

{ Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Thee symbol is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be power

washed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such as


Vehicle Care 10-75

calcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

{ Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

may damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

{ Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum or stainlesssteel. To prevent damage alwaysfollow these cleaning instructions:. Be sure the molding is cool to

the touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use a cleaning solutionapproved for aluminum orstainless steel. Some cleanersare highly acidic or containalkaline substances and candamage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use chrome cleaners.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals and stripes. Followinstructions under "Washing theVehicle" previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhen dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:. Abrasive or caustic agents.. Washer fluids and other cleaning

agents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

{ Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshieldwhen washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfaces


Vehicle Care 10-77

can be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11-12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

{ Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

{ Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

{ Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steelfuel door hinge, unless thecomponents are plastic. Applying


10-78 Vehicle Care

silicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and falluse plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.


Vehicle Care 10-79

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

{ Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.


10-80 Vehicle Care

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholstery

cleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

{ Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

{ Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-81

Caution (Continued)

may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, spot lifters, or spotremovers. Do not use cleanersthat contain silicone or wax-basedproducts. Cleaners containingthese solvents can permanentlychange the appearance and feelof leather or soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

{ Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by two hook-type retainers.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

1. Pull up on the rear of the mat toremove it from the hooks.

2. Reinstall by lining up the floormat retainer openings over thecarpet retainers and hook intoposition.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended FluidsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trained

technicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

{ Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.The Additional RequiredServices - Normal are forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel on page 9-36.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional RequiredServices - Severe are for vehiclesthat are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10-3.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10-8.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-44.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-50.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-20.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. When theCHANGE ENGINE OIL NOWmessage displays, have the engineoil and filter changed as soon as



possible. If driven under the bestconditions, the engine oil life systemmay not indicate the need forvehicle service for up to a year.

The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year andthe oil life system must be reset.Your trained dealer technician canperform this work. If the engine oillife system is reset accidentally,service the vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the last service.Reset the oil life system when theoil is changed. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10-10.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10-50.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, and

reset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10-8 and Engine OilLife System on page 10-10.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10-14.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-20.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10-74. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10-25.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10-44.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10-50.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-12.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10-74.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3-16.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10-74.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10-24.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10-24.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10-25.



. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10-25.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2-14.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-13.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped withAWD. (4) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7) @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if the

vehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.



(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-13.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Careon page 10-74.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.



Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break-down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.



Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through the

rubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10-78 and Exterior Care onpage 10-74.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.



Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1® specification of the properSAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended.See Engine Oil on page 10-8.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10-14.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 88900401).

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood and Liftgate Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241).

Sunroof Track Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770) or Dielectric SiliconeGrease (GM Part No. 12345579).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96815102 —

Engine Oil Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

3.0L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 20901295 CF177

Spark Plugs

2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108

3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109



Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 60.0 cm (24.0 in) 95479599 —

Passenger Side – 40.0 cm (16.0 in) 95479597 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (12.0 in) 96624648 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.4L L4 Engine 8.5 L 9.0 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 10.9 L 11.5 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank 63.1 L 16.6 gal

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 (LEA) K Automatic 0.75–0.90 mm(0.030–0.035 in)

3.0L V6 (LFW) 5 Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm(0.037–0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L L4 Engine

3.0L V6 Engine


12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-8Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-11

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com

The Chevrolet online ownerexperience is a one-stop resourcethat allows interaction withChevrolet and keeps importantvehicle-specific information in oneplace.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,alerts, OnStar onboard vehiclediagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): View andprint dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12-1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio (if equipped), and OnStaraccount information.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.chevrolet.com to registeryour vehicle.



Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Take a trip to the Chevrolet OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.



. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner or

driver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is not givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,

must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.



Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 liters. Diesel fueldelivery may be restricted.Propane and other fuels are notprovided through this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may give

permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem is

safety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.



Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowed

by GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resale



value, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history of

these parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repair

center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.



If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3-22.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.



If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as in



connection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the acceleratorand/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,

if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the



OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Vehicle Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connection, andDiagnostic Services. OnStarservices may require a paidsubscription. OnStar requires thevehicle battery and electricalsystem, cellular service, and GPSsatellite signals to be available andoperating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting public emergency serviceproviders. OnStar may collectinformation about you and your

vehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar’s Termsand Conditions and PrivacyStatement for more details includingsystem limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is on.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.. Off: System is off. Press the blue

OnStar button twice to speakwith an OnStar Advisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.


14-2 OnStar

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires a specific OnStarsubscription plan.

. Obtain the WiFi network name,or Service Set Identifier or SSID,and passphrase (if equipped).

PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions.

Requires a specific OnStarsubscription plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage WiFi Settings (ifequipped).

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Emergency Advisoravailable 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get assistance in severe

weather or other crisis andevacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the OnStar system canautomatically connect to an OnStarEmergency Advisor. The built-insystem can automatically connect tohelp in certain crashes.

Press> to connect to an OnStarEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can provideimportant information to emergencypersonnel. OnStar EmergencyAdvisors are trained to provideassistance and link to existingpublic emergency service providersin emergency situations.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Crisis Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information if acrisis occurs.


OnStar 14-3

SecurityOnStar provides services includingStolen Vehicle Assistance, RemoteIgnition Block, and RoadsideAssistance, if equipped. OnStar canunlock the vehicle doors remotely,if equipped with automatic doorlocks, and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires aspecific OnStar subscription plan.

PressQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Subscribers cansend destinations fromMapQuest.com to the vehicleTurn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system (ifequipped). When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.


14-4 OnStar

Destination Download: PressQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle (ifequipped). After the call ends, pressthe “Go” button on the navigationscreen to begin driving directions.

If directions are downloaded to thenavigation system, the route canonly be canceled through thenavigation system.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav orDestination Download, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsA required specific OnStarsubscription plan includes theservices that follow to helpcustomers stay connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

WiFi Connectivity (If Equipped)

The vehicle has a WiFi hotspot thatprovides a high-speed, wirelessInternet connection to connectmultiple mobile devices (data planrequired).

1. To retrieve WiFi hotspotinformation, press= and selector say “WiFi settings.”

2. The WiFi settings will display theWiFi network name/SSID,passphrase, and level ofencryption.

3. To change the SSID orpassphrase, pressQ or call1-888-4-ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor.

OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App(If Equipped)

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple®,Android™, and BlackBerry® orWindows 7 or 8 mobile devices.From the mobile device, check thevehicle’s fuel level, oil life, or tire

pressure (if the vehicle is equippedwith the tire pressure monitoringsystem); or activate remote hornand lights. Also remote start thevehicle (if factory equipped) orunlock the doors from anywherewith a wireless connection (ifequipped with automatic locks).With the required specific OnStarsubscription plan, a destination canbe sent to the vehicle. For OnStarRemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

OnStar RemoteLink® Key FobServices

This feature is included for fiveyears and allows for remote doorlock/unlock (if equipped withautomatic locks), remote start (iffactory equipped), or activation ofhorn and lights from anywhere witha wireless signal. Download the appand start using it any time during thetrial period to get started.


OnStar 14-5

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

This service allows calls to be madeand received from the vehicle.

To Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to tryagain. System responds: “OK,storing <name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

Vehicle DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics canperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andother major vehicle systems. It also


14-6 OnStar

checks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If anOn-Demand Diagnostics check isneeded, pressQ, and an Advisorcan run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR immediatelyto terminate your OnStar services ifthe vehicle is disposed of, sold,transferred, or if the lease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain theOnStar service options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR

(1-888-466-7827).. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for service


OnStar 14-7

in that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservices. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. The PIN will need to bechanged the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4-ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.


14-8 OnStar

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five days.After five days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance and alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Do not place items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for features

to function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-47. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third parties


OnStar 14-9

may unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - libcurl and unzipacknowledgments

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software. Beloware the notices and licensesassociated with this software:

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license.The definitive version of thisdocument should be availableat ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley,Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,


14-10 OnStar

Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or other

materials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of thealtered versions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),

“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP. Suchaltered versions are furtherprohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its own sourceand binary releases.


INDEX i-1

AAbout Driving the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . iiiAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-19AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 9-24, 10-24Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Audio SystemFixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticClimate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-25BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19

BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-16

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 10-28Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-29Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

CameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-25

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-38

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44, 3-46Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9


INDEX i-3

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-8Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-65CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-8Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-24, 10-24

Driver Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


i-4 INDEX

Driving (cont'd)Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Driving the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Economy ModeFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-17Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-4Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Cooling System Messages . . .5-29Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-21Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-20Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

FlexFuelE85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . .10-11Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . .6-4, 10-28

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6


INDEX i-5

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-21Requirements, California . . . . .9-37System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-41Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23GaugesFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Heating and AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1, 8-5

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-45Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11


i-6 INDEX

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-12Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-31Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-39LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-17Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-20

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Gate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Low Washer Fluid Warning . . .5-22Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-21Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-16StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-19


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont'd)Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Traction Control System(TCS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-19LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-21Low Washer Fluid WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-14Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-29Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Object Detection System . . . . .5-32Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-32Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Messages (cont'd)Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-12Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14


i-8 INDEX

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-30Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® VehicleDiagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-19Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-24

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-21Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-17Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Power Steering WarningLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . 13-13

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7


INDEX i-9

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-34Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-30Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-17

Reporting Safety DefectsGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-17Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15

Safety Defects ReportingGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7


i-10 INDEX

SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-46

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1

Service (cont'd)Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Special Application Services . . . 11-8Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10StabiliTrakIndicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-19Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Storage AreasCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Management System . . . 4-2Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv


INDEX i-11

SystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1, 13-15Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-47Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Tires (cont'd)Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-46Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-40Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-40Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-70Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

TractionControl System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-41Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii


i-12 INDEX

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-35Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Washer Fluid, Low WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-36Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-25WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Date post:	31-Dec-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	dodien
View:	225 times
Download:	0 times

Owner's Manual - Chevrolet · Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Mexico-...

Documents